Yamaha RX-V995 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V995

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: Handleiding

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

AV RECEIVER

AMPLI-TUNER AUDIO-VIDEO

RX-V995

U C A

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating

instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause

the unit and

cart combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit

should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its

location or position does not interfere with its proper

ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated

on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the

ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow

of air through the ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances

that produce heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating

instructions or as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating

instructions. All other servicing should be referred to

qualified service personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol, within an equilateral triangle,

is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

•

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

CAUTION

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of your unit

in the space below.

Model:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of

the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place

for future reference.

English

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.

Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try

to eliminate the problem by using one of the following

measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of

your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the

sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring

or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is

grounded so as to provide some protection against

voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of

the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides

information with regard to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to

an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to

grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding

electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a Yamaha Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP)

System—an extremely sophisticated audio component. The DSP system takes full

advantage of Yamaha’s undisputed leadership in the field of digital audio processing

to bring you a whole new world of listening experiences. Follow the instructions in this

manual carefully when setting up your system, and the DSP system will sonically

transform your room into a wide range of listening environments—anything from a

famous concert hall to a cozy jazz club. In addition, you get incredible realism from

most of surround-sound encoded video sources available in the market using the built-

in Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder, Dolby Digital Decoder and DTS Decoder.

Five built-in channels of amplification on this model mean that no additional

amplifiers are required to enjoy advanced digital sound field processing.

Rather than tell you about the wonders of digital sound field processing, however,

let’s get right down to the business of setting up the system and trying out its many

capabilities. Please read this operation manual carefully and store it in a safe place for

later reference.

English

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

........................................... Inside of the Front Cover

CAUTION .................................................................. 2

INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 3

Features .................................................................... 3

What’s DSP?............................................................. 4

GETTING STARTED ................................................ 7

Getting started.......................................................... 7

Unpacking.............................................................. 7

Installing batteries in the remote controller ........... 8

Notes about the remote controller.......................... 8

Controls and their functions................................... 9

Front panel............................................................. 9

Display panel........................................................ 11

PREPARATION ...................................................... 12

Speaker setup......................................................... 12

Connections ........................................................... 14

Audio/video source equipment ............................ 14

Speakers ............................................................. 22

Antennas ............................................................. 25

Plugging in this unit ............................................. 27

On screen display.................................................. 28

Selecting the output modes

(“SET MENU” mode) ............................................. 29

Speaker balance adjustment ................................ 32

BASIC OPERATION ............................................... 35

Playing a source .................................................... 35

Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing

from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD)......................... 40

Sound control......................................................... 42

Tuning ..................................................................... 43

Basic operation ................................................... 43

Preset tuning........................................................ 44

Using digital sound field processor (DSP) ......... 47

Playing a source with an effect of the digital

sound field processor (DSP)................................ 47

Adjusting output level of the center, right rear,

left rear speakers and subwoofer......................... 50

Brief overview of digital sound field programs...... 52

ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................... 56

“SET MENU” mode ............................................... 56

Creating your own sound fields .......................... 60

Setting the SLEEP timer ....................................... 65

REMOTE CONTROLLER ....................................... 66

Basic operation (Cover is open) .......................... 66

Using the “learning-capable” keys

(Cover is open)....................................................... 68

Using OPERATION CONTROL keys

(Cover is closed) ................................................... 70

Macro operations (Cover is closed) .................... 72

Methods of learning and clearing functions ....... 74

CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE ......................... 77

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 79

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 82

CONTENTS

1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from

windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,

dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming

(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not expose the unit to rain or water.

3. Never remove the unit cover. Contact your dealer if an

object falls inside the unit.

4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires.

When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and

the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull on the

wires themselves.

5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of

the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature

inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing

objects against these openings, and install the unit in a

well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage.

Be sure to allow a space of at least 10 cm behind, 20 cm

on the both sides and 35 cm above the top panel of the

unit to prevent fire and damage.

6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on

this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than

specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other

accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any

damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other

than specified.

7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with

other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move

this unit farther away from such equipment if interference

is observed.

8. Always set the VOLUME control to “–

∞

” before starting

the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an

appropriate level after playback has been started.

9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents;

this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

10.Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

regarding common operating errors before concluding that

the unit is faulty.

11.When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time,

disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

12.To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power

plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm.

13.Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not

defeated.

14.Do not connect an audio unit to the AC outlet on the rear

panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet

is rated to provide.

15.Voltage Selector (China and General Models only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must

be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode.

In this mode, this unit is designed to consume a small

amount of power.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models

only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located

at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area.

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of

this unit from the AC outlet.

For Canadian Customers

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide

slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES–003.

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this

unit may be damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE

STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED:

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to

either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit

is in the standby mode.

SPEAKERS

REAR

SWITCHED

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

60Hz

I00W

CENTER : 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

CENTER : 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

( SURROUND )

CENTER

MAX.TOTAL

I20V

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

(U.S.A. model)

CAUTION : Read this before operating your unit.

English

5 Channel Power Amplification

Main: 100W + 100W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Center: 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power,

0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Rear: 100W + 100W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

●

Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)

●

Dolby Digital Decoder

●

Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder

●

DTS Decoder

●

CINEMA DSP:Theater-like Sound

Experience by the Combination of

YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby

Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS

●

Automatic Input Balance Control for

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

●

Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker

Balance Adjustment

●

Speaker Output Mode Selection

Capability for the Most Suitable Use of

Your Speaker System

Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner

● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

● Automatic Preset Tuning

● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset

Editing)

● IF Count Direct PLL Synthesizer Tuning

System

Others

●

“SET MENU”Mode which Provides You

with 13 Titles of Setting Changes and

Adjustments for Optimizing This Unit for

Your Audio/Video System

● BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing

Bass Response

● On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

●

REC OUT Selector which is Independent of

Input Source Selection

● SLEEP Timer

●

OPTICAL and COAXIAL Digital Audio

Signal Terminals

●

6 Channel External Decoder Input for Other

Future Formats

● Video Signal Input/Output Capability

(Including S Video Connections)

●

Multi-Functional

remote controller

with

“Learning”Capability

●

Dual-Room Audio/Video System Setup

Capability (Custom Installation)

Features

INTRODUCTION

Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment.

This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV

receiver available. Some of the more advanced features may

not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art

technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater

Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have

probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature

films in theaters around the world.

To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this

unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening

environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound

field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an

outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take

some time now to read more about these features and enjoy

the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater.

Digital Sound Field Processing

Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30

years have enhanced the listening experience with improved

clarity, precision and power. However, something has still been

missing: The atmosphere and acoustic ambiance of the public

venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched

the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects

inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters

and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of

those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they

collected is used to recreate these environments in digital

sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields are created

using data measured directly at the original venue; others are

created from combinations of data to form unique

environments for specific purposes.

Of course, that only solves half of the problem. These

engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your

listening room, so we’ve made it possible for you to adjust the

various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to

your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any

source and in combination with any of the following surround

sound technologies. Some are designed especially for music,

and some especially for movies.

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

Dolby Pro Logic Surround has been used in movie theaters

since the mid-seventies. It has also been available in home

entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to

be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four

discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and

dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a

center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound

effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow

frequency range.

Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Pro Logic

Surround encoding as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The

Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder built into this unit employs a

digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel

for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with

standard analog processors.

Introduction

What’s DSP?

INTRODUCTION

English

Dolby Digital is the next level of Dolby Surround sound system

developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate

audio coding.

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides

completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby

Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes

referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left,

center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only

effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency

effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other

channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE

channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to

the term 5.1 channels in total.

Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system

(left front, center, right front and just one surround channel),

Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or

split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the

three front channels.

By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience

the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater

sound in your home.

Wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full range

channels and precise sound orientation by the digital sound

processing presents listeners much excitement and realism

that has never been experienced before.

Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as mentioned left, and

moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2

channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2

channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby

Digital in the market.

Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit

from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be

applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of

Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide

an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation. “DOLBY”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to

replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete

channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many

theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system

changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six

discrete channels of superb digital audio.

The DTS technology, through intense research and

development, made it possible to deliver a similar

encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surround-

sound entertainment.

The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which

delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically

5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and

two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as

“0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that

are currently available for home theater systems

The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the

six channels of 20-bit audio onto some laserdiscs, compact

discs and DVDs with considerably less data-compression.

By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can

experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS

installed theater’s high quality sound in your home.

Laserdisc, compact disc and DVD are home audio format

within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel

audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new

multi-channel music recordings will also become available in

the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.)

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued

and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of

DTS Digital Surround

Dolby Digital

INTRODUCTION

Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and

the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround-

decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide

acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the

room, letting you feel much presence as if you were

watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater.

This combination is available when the digital sound field

program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 10

is selected, and the input signal of the source is analog,

PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channels.

Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and

the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby

Digital-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field

respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and

much surround effect in the room without losing high

channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby

Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you

feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby

Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This is the

most ideal home theater sound at the present time.

This combination is available when the digital sound field

program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS

DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected, and the

input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital

(except in 2-channels) or encoded with the DTS.

CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP

The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full

ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are

originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater

that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound

environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is

difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the

number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening

room is very different from a movie theater.

However, Yamaha DSP technology allows you to create nearly

the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in

your home by compensating for the lack of presence and

dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields

combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround

sounds.

The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs

that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Surround or DTS.

CINEMA DSP

INTRODUCTION

English

GETTING STARTED

Getting started

Remote controller

User function stickers

Indoor FM Antenna

AM Loop Antenna

Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Batteries (size AA, LR6, UM-3)

Unpacking

Carefully remove this unit and accessories from the box. You should find the unit itself and the following accessories.

Installing batteries in the remote

controller

Since the remote controller will be used for many of this unit’s

control operations, you should begin by installing the supplied

batteries.

1. Turn the remote controller over and slide the battery

compartment cover in the direction of the arrow.

2. Insert the batteries (AA, LR6, UM-3 type) according to the

polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery compartment cover.

4. After the batteries are inserted, press the RESET button

before using the remote controller.

Notes about the remote controller

Battery replacement

If you find that the remote controller must be used closer to the

main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with

new ones.

Notes

●

Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries.

(It is recommended to use an LR6 type to use the remote

controller for a long period of time.)

●

Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside

the battery compartment.)

●

Remove the batteries if the remote controller is not used for

an extended period of time.

●

If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material and contact with clothing, etc.

Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

Remote controller operation range

Notes

●

The area between the remote controller and the main unit

must be clear of large obstacles.

●

Do not expose the remote control sensor to strong lighting,

in particular, an inverter type fluorescent lamp. Otherwise,

the remote controller may not work properly. If necessary,

position the main unit away from direct lighting.

RESET button

30°

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

40 60

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately

6 m (19.7 feet)

GETTING STARTED

English

Controls and their functions

Front panel

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITALDIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

8AB0JKLOQMP

23 456

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

MEMORY EDIT FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

EFGH

1 STANDBY/ON switch

Press this switch to turn on the power. Press this switch again

to set this unit in the standby mode.

* A click from the switch and the initial rotation of the built-in

fan will be heard when the power is turned on.

Standby mode

This unit is still using a small amount of power in this mode

in order to be ready to receive infrared-signals from the

remote controller.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote controller.

3 Display panel

Displays a variety of information. (Refer to page 11 for details.)

4 EXT. DECODER button

Press this button to select the input signals from the

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source.

This function takes priority over the INPUT SELECTOR

setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display

panel.

The source selected with the INPUT SELECTOR knob

becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is

not illuminated on the display panel.

5 INPUT SELECTOR

Turn this knob to select the input source.

The selected source will be shown on the display.

6 Master VOLUME control

Simultaneously controls volume for all output sounds; front

effect, main, rear, center and subwoofer. (The REC OUT level

is not affected.)

* The indicator on the master VOLUME control will flash when

the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the

remote controller.

7 PHONES jack

Headphones can be plugged into this jack for private listening.

You can listen to the sound to be output from the main

speakers through headphones. When listening with

headphones privately, press both SPEAKERS A and B

switches to cancel both of the main speakers A and B, and

turn off the digital sound field processor by pressing the

EFFECT button so that no DSP program name is illuminated

on the display panel.

For the remote controller, refer to pages 66 to 67.

GETTING STARTED

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E button

Press this button to select a group (A–E) of preset stations.

9 SPEAKERS switches

Press the switch A or B (or both) for the main speakers you will

use to select them. Press the switch for the main speakers you

will not use again to cancel them. On the display panel,

“SPEAKERS A” and/or “SPEAKERS B” will be illuminated,

depending on which main speakers are being selected.

0 Preset station number selector buttons

Select a preset station number (1 to 8).

A BASS EXTENSION button

Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency

response at the main left and right channels while maintaining

overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing

the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used.

B TONE BYPASS button

Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and

TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting

pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone

control circuitry can be used when this button is released

outward (OFF).

C BASS and TREBLE controls

Rotate these knobs to adjust the low and high frequency

response for the left and right main channels only.

D BALANCE control

This knob controls the sound from the main speakers only.

The balance of the output volume to the left and right main

speakers can be adjusted to compensate for sound imbalances

caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions.

E MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) button

Use this button to enter a station to memory. Refer to the

section “Manual preset tuning” on page 44 for details.

Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start

automatic preset tuning. Refer to page 45 for details.

F EDIT button

This button is used to exchange the places of two preset

stations with each other.

G TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) button

Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic

and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator is illuminated on the

display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so

that the “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated.

H FM/AM button

Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and

AM.

I REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector

Rotate this knob to select the source for recording to an MD

recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. This setting is independent of

the INPUT SELECTOR setting, except when the REC

OUT/ZONE 2 selector is set to the SOURCE position. Then

the INPUT SELECTOR is used to select the source for

recording to the MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR.

For a user who made up a dual-room audio/video system

with this unit:

The setting of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector controls the

input source for the second room.

J LEVEL button

This button is used to adjust the output level of the center and

rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this button (several

times) to select the speaker(s). The name appears on the

display. Then press the + or – button (

) to change the output

level.

K –/+ button

Adjusts the level of the speaker(s) selected by pressing the

LEVEL button. Moreover, performs setting changes and

adjustments for functions selected by pressing the SET MENU

button (

L).

L SET MENU button

Press this button once or more to select the desired function in

the SET MENU mode.

M TUNING DOWN/UP button

Used for tuning. Press the “UP” side to tune in to a higher

frequency, and press the “DOWN” side to tune in to a lower

frequency.

N PROGRAM selector button

Press this button in the or direction to select a digital

sound field processing program.

O EFFECT button

Press this button to turn on and off the output from the center

and rear speakers. The sound becomes normal 2-channel

when this function is turned off.

However, this does not apply to Dolby Digital or DTS. The

signals at all channels will be distributed to the main channels

and output from the main speakers, even if the output from the

center and rear speakers are turned off, when Dolby Digital or

DTS is decoded.

P VIDEO AUX terminals

Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a

camcorder to these terminals. A video unit with a S video

output terminal can be connected to the S VIDEO terminal to

obtain a high resolution picture. The source can be selected

with the INPUT SELECTOR and REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector.

Q INPUT MODE button

Press this button to select how input signals are received from

sources that output two or more types of signals. The “AUTO”,

“DTS” and “ANALOG” modes are available. Refer to page 38

for details.

<China, Singapore and General models only>

The “AUTO”, “D.D.RF”, “DTS”, “DGTL” and “ANALOG” modes

are available for DVD/LD sources.

GETTING STARTED

English

Display panel

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

SLEEP

ENHANCED MOVIE THEATER 12 TV SPORTS

MONO MOVIE DISCO JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT CHURCH CONCERT HALL

MEMORY

AUTO

0 20 100

STEREO

12 3

45 7 8 0 B

SPEAKERS

1 indicators

Either “dts” indicators will be illuminated when the built-in DTS

decoder is turned on.

A red “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a compact

disc or laserdisc encoded with DTS.

An orange “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a

DVD encoded with DTS.

An orange “dts” indicator may be illuminated when playing a

laserdisc encoded with DTS after a video-CD or DVD on a

DVD/LD combi-player.

2 Multi-information display

This display shows the current DSP program and the status of

adjustments and setting changes. Several statuses can be

viewed at one time. The current station frequency and band

(AM or FM) will also appear when the tuner source input mode

is selected.

3 Input source indicators

One of the arrows for these indicators will be illuminated

depending on which source is selected.

4 DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators

The DIGITAL indicator will be illuminated when the built-in

Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the source

encoded with Dolby Digital are not 2-channels.

The PRO LOGIC indicator will be illuminated when the

built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on.

5 DSP indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in digital sound

field processor is on.

6 SPEAKERS A/B indicators

One of these indicators will be illuminated depending on which

main speakers are selected. Both indicators will be illuminated

when both speakers A and B are selected.

7 MEMORY indicator

A flashing MEMORY indicator means a station can be saved,

as explained in the following:

Press the MEMORY button. The MEMORY indicator will flash

about 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, program the

displayed station to memory by using the A/B/C/D/E and the

preset station number selector buttons.

8 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program will be illuminated in

the following cases.

• When the tuner is selected as the input source.

• When a DSP program parameter is selected or adjusted.

• When the DSP program No. 8, 9 or the subprogram

“Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected.

There is no illumination here when no DSP program is

selected

9 AUTO indicator

This indicator will be illuminated during the automatic tuning

mode.

0 STEREO indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when an FM stereo broadcast

with sufficient signal strength is received.

A Signal-level indicator

This indicator shows the signal level of the received station. If

multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases.

B SLEEP indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in SLEEP timer

is on.

GETTING STARTED

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field

quality with a full five-speaker system setup, using a pair of

main speakers to output main source sounds, a pair of effect

speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker

for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a five-

speaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of

effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive

ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to

begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the five-

speaker system later.

Use of the center dialog speaker is

recommended

When playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or

playing back a source which contains center-channel signals

with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are

output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to

maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater

system, it is recommended that you use a center channel

speaker.

If, for some reason, it is not practical to use a center speaker, it

is possible to enjoy the movie without it. Best results, however,

are obtained with the full system.

Use of a subwoofer expands your sound

field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer

is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any

or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the

subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a

source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded. You may wish to

choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier.

Speaker setup

m Speakers and speaker placement

Your full five-speaker system will require two speaker pairs:

the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers) and the

REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may

also be using a SUBWOOFER.

The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models

and have enough power handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system.

Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN

SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is

ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce

sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER and REAR

SPEAKERS.

Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the ordinary position.

Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position.

They should be nearly 1.8m above the floor.

Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two

MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker

above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically

shielded speaker.)

If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo

Processing Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is

not so critical because low bass tones are not highly

directional.

m Setting up your speaker system

Main speaker

Center speaker

Rear speaker

Subwoofer

PREPARATION

5 Speaker System

The recommended system for enjoying Audio/Video

sources.

By the use of a center speaker, center channel sounds (dialog,

vocals etc.) are precisely localized.

1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “LRG” or “SML”.

(See page 29.)

4 Speaker System

Basic system.

You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding a pair of

rear speakers to a basic stereo speaker system.

However, center channel sounds must be output from the left

and right main speakers.

1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “NONE”. (See page 29.)

English

PREPARATION

m Speaker system configurations

Caution: Plug in this unit and other components after all connections are completed.

All connections must be correct, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also refer to the owner’s manual for

each of your components.

Audio/video source equipment

●

Use RCA type pin plug cables for audio/video units with the exception described later.

●

The output (or input) terminals of YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 3, 4, etc. on the rear panel must be connected to

the same-numbered terminals of this unit.

PHONO

VIDEO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

OPTICAL

TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

GND

OUTPUT

LINE OUT

LINE IN

(U.S.A. model)

Turntable

MD recorder,

Tape deck, etc.

CD player

m Basic connections of audio units

(*1): GND terminal (For turntable use)

Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND

terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases

better results may be obtained with the ground wire

disconnected.

: Indicates the direction of signals.

Connections

PREPARATION

(*1)

PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models only)

This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL

television formats. Set this switch to the position for the

format your TV monitor employs.

PAL: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the

PAL format.

Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter

which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is

sent from an external video unit to this unit.

NTSC: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the

NTSC format.

Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter

which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is

sent from an external video unit to this unit.

Note

Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same

format that your TV monitor employs, otherwise a picture

will not be played back normally.

English

VIDEO IN

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

PHONO

VIDEO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

OPTICAL

TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

S VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

(U.S.A. model)

LD player or

DVD player

TV monitor

PAL/NTSC switch

m Basic connections of video units

Video cassette

recorder 2

Video cassette

recorder 1

TV/Satellite tuner

PREPARATION

VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel)

These terminals are used to connect a video input source such

as a camcorder.

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

S VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

S VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT L

AUDIO OUT R

Camcorder

: S-video cable

(Refer to page 20 for details

about the S VIDEO terminal.)

IN OUT

S VIDEO

REMOTE

CONTROL

PAL

NTSC

m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals

If your CD player, MD recorder, LD player, DVD player,

TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical

digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to

this unit’s COAXIAL or OPTICAL, or both terminals.

Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog

audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are

necessary, especially for an LD player, a DVD player or a CD

player to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to

this unit.

To make an optical digital connection between this unit and an

external unit, remove the cover from each optical terminal, and

then connect them by using a commercially available optical

fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables

might not function correctly.

Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or

COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit

connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals

of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to only analog audio signal terminals

of this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals

between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 38 for details.)

* However, if you connect an MD recorder or DAT to this

unit’s OPTICAL TAPE/MD IN and OUT terminals, it can

record input sources connected to this unit’s OPTICAL

digital signal input terminals.

PHONO

VIDEO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

OPTICAL

TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD

TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

S VIDEO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

OUT

MD recorder, DAT,

etc.

CD player

TV/Satellite tunerLD player or DVD player

(U.S.A. model)

PREPARATION

<U.S.A., Canada and Australia models>

: Optical fiber cable

: Coaxial cable

English

PREPARATION

Notes

●

When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital

and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to

both terminals of the same name.

●

Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals

are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from

dust.

●

In order to make this unit perform successful DTS-decoding,

the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or

corrupted in the process of sending the DTS bitstream from

the DIGITAL OUT terminal of an external unit to a digital

signal input terminal of this unit.

●

Digital audio signals will not be output from the ZONE 2

OUT AUDIO SIGNAL terminals of this unit.

●

All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the

sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.

: Optical fiber cable

: Coaxial cable

<China, Singapore and General models>

PHONO

VIDEO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

GND

TV/DBSCD

TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

S VIDEO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

ANT

GND

CDDVD/LD

STEP

DIGITAL

RF SIGNAL

DIGITAL

FREQUENCY

50kHz 9 kHz

I00kHz I0kHz

DIGITAL SIGNAL

OPTICAL

MD recorder, DAT,

etc.

CD player

TV/Satellite tunerLD player or DVD player

(General model)

If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF

signal output terminal, it can be connected to this unit by using

an RF demodulator (separate purchase).

First, connect the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal of

the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the DOLBY DIGITAL RF

signal input terminal of the RF demodulator. Next, connect the

coaxial digital signal output terminal of the RF demodulator to

the COAXIAL digital signal input terminal of this unit.

This connection is necessary for sending audio signals of an

LD source encoded with Dolby Digital to this unit.

It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to

this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the

DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back

a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal

stereo (or monaural).

You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal

of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD

digital signal input terminal of this unit.

This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source

with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD

source with DTS decoded.

When these connections are completed, set the input mode of

the DVD/LD source to “AUTO”, and you will hear sounds

decoded with Dolby Digital even if signals are input to both

COAXIAL and OPTICAL digital signal input terminals of this

unit. This is because signals input to the COAXIAL terminal

take priority over signals input to the OPTICAL terminal.

Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode.

Notes

●

If, for example, you play a CD on the DVD/LD/CD combi-

player, there is no input to the COAXIAL terminal, so the

signals input to the OPTICAL terminal take priority. In this

case, switch off the RF demodulator to listen to CD sound

without interference. However, if your RF demodulator is the

Yamaha model APD-1, you do not have to switch it off.

●

When you want to play an LD source encoded with Dolby

Digital without decoding Dolby Digital, you must switch off

the power of the RF demodulator.

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

OPTICAL

TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

RF IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG

OUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

RF OUT

DVD/LD/CD

combi-player, etc.

(U.S.A. model)

RF demodulator

m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL RF output of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player

PREPARATION

English

PREPARATION

If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF

signal output terminal, connect it to this unit’s DIGITAL RF

SIGNAL input terminal. Audio signals of an LD source encoded

with the Dolby Digital are input to this unit by this connection.

* To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital decoded,

set the input mode of DVD/LD to “AUTO” or “D.D.RF”.

(Refer to page 38 for details.)

It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to

this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the

DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back

a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal

stereo (or monaural).

You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal

of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD

digital signal input terminal of this unit.

This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source

with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD

source with DTS decoded.

Note

DOLBY DIGITAL RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by

a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. To record a source played

back on the DVD/LD/CD combi-player, it must be connected to

the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and analog

audio signal input terminals of this unit.

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

GND

TV/DBSCD

TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

DIGITAL OUT

ANALOG OUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

RF OUT

DIGITAL SIGNAL

OPTICAL

ANT

GND

CDDVD/LD

STEP

DIGITAL

RF SIGNAL

DIGITAL

FREQUENCY

50kHz 9kHz

I00kHz I0kHz

DVD/LD/CD

combi-player

(General model)

VIDEO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO IN

m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals

If your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. and your

monitor are equipped with “S” video terminals, connect them to

this unit’s S VIDEO terminals, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your monitor.

With this connection, you can play back and record high quality

pictures. Otherwise, connect the “composite” video terminals

from your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. to the

VIDEO terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminal to the “composite” video input of your

monitor.

Note

If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO

input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective

output terminals.

Notes about the Video superimpose

●

If you watch a video source that is connected to both S

VIDEO and VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of

screen display information are output from only the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal.

●

When no video signal is input to either S VIDEO or VIDEO

input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display

information are output from both S VIDEO MONITOR OUT

and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals with a color

background.

* For China and General models, if the PAL/NTSC switch

on the rear panel is set to “PAL”, nothing will be output

from either S VIDEO MONITOR OUT or VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminal in this case.

S VIDEO terminals

This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition

to standard type VIDEO terminals.

S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into

luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison

with S VIDEO terminals, standard type VIDEO terminals

transmit “composite” video signals.

LD player or DVD player

TV/Satellite tuner

Video cassette recorder 1

Video cassette recorder 2

TV monitor

PREPARATION

: S-video cable

English

This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal

input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear

surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) for

inputting signals from an external decoder of a future format to

this unit.

To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these

terminals, press the EXT. DECODER button on the front panel

so that “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. By doing so,

the signals input to these terminals are sent to the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and OUTPUT terminals

of this unit.

Notes

●

When signals input to these terminals are selected, the

digital sound field processor cannot be used.

●

The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR

SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT”

in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input

to these terminals. The setting of “5. MAIN LEVEL” is

effective. (Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details.)

●

The adjustments of the output level of the center speaker,

rear speakers and subwoofer are effective when the signals

input to these terminals are selected as the input source.

(Refer to pages 50 to 51 for details.)

Connecting an external decoder of a future format to this unit

PHONO

VIDEO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

OPTICAL

TV/DBSCDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD/LD

DIGITAL SIGNAL

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

S VIDEO

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUT

SURROUND OUT

CENTER

OUT

MAIN OUT

External decoder

(U.S.A. model)

PREPARATION

Speakers

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

CAUTION

CENTER

REAR

IN OUT

OUTPUT

REAR

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

( SURROUND )

REMOTE

CONTROL

MAIN

CENTER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

CENTER : 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

CENTER : 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SPEAKERS

Center speaker

Left

(U.S.A. model)

Right

Main speakers A

Rear speakers

Subwoofer system

Left

Right

Left

Right

Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

➀

Loosen the knob.

➁

Insert the bare wire.

[Remove approx. 5mm

(1/4”) insulation from

the speaker wires.]

➂

Tighten the knob and

secure the wire.

Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the

Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal.

How to Connect:

Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with the wire of the proper gauge (keep as short as possible). If the

connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct. That is

the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

Caution

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit or the

speakers, or both.

PREPARATION

Main speakers B

English

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this

unit may be damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE

STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED:

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to

either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit

is in the standby mode.

Select the position whose requirements your speaker system

meets.

(Upper position)

Center:

<U.S.A. and Canada models>

The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or

higher.

<Australia, China, Singapore and General

models

The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or

higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or

higher.

Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

(Lower position)

Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

Main:

If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance

of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

If you use two pairs of main speakers, the

impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

SPEAKERS

REAR

SWITCHED

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

60Hz

I00W

CENTER : 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

CENTER : 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

( SURROUND )

CENTER

MAX.TOTAL

I20V

(U.S.A. model)

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

Note on main speaker connections:

One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

SPEAKERS A or B terminals.

Note on a subwoofer connection:

You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies

or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when

reproducing discrete signals.

When using a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER terminal

of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier,

and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier

to the subwoofer.

With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo

Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer

are in the same unit. Such a subwoofer needs only the

connection between the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit

and the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer.

(Refer to page 24 for details about the SUBWOOFER

terminal.)

PREPARATION

The speaker connections described on page 22 are fine for

most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to

drive main, center and/or rear speakers with your existing

amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for

connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit.

1 MAIN terminals

These terminals are for main channel line output.

If you drive main speakers with an external stereo power

amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external

amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a

receiver) to these terminals.

There is no connection to these terminals when you use

the built-in amplifier.

* Output signals from the MAIN terminals are affected by

the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, BASS

EXTENSION button and the TONE BYPASS button.

2 SUBWOOFER terminal

When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to

this terminal. Low frequencies distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal.

(The cut-off frequency of this terminal is 90 Hz.) Signals

of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when Dolby

Digital or DTS is decoded are also output if they are

assigned to this terminal.

3 CENTER terminal

This terminal is for center channel line output.

If you drive a center speaker with an external power

amplifier, connect the input terminal of the external

amplifier to this terminal.

There is no connection to this terminal when you use the

built-in amplifier.

4 REAR (SURROUND) terminals

These terminals are for rear channel line output.

If you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power

amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external

amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a

receiver) to these terminals.

There is no connection to these terminals when you use

the built-in amplifier.

Notes

•

Output level of signals from all of these terminals are

adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel

or MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote controller.

•

If an external power amplifier is connected to the MAIN,

CENTER or REAR output terminals, do not use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals (MAIN, CENTER or

REAR).

m To drive main, center and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CAUTION

CENTER

REAR

IN OUT

OUTPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

OUTPUT

( SURROUND )

REMOTE

CONTROL

MAIN

CEN

PREPARATION

English

Antennas

●

Each antenna should be connected to the designated terminals correctly, as shown in the following figure.

●

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal

strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality only with the indoor antennas, the use of an outdoor antenna may result in improvement.

PHONO

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

CDCD DVD/LD TAPE/MD

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DIGITAL SIGNAL

EXTERNAL

DECODER

INPUT

TAPE/MD

( PLAY )

OUT

( REC )

MAIN

SUB WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

COAXIAL

Outdoor FM antenna

Outdoor AM antenna

AM loop

antenna

(included)

Ground

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

75-ohm coaxial cable

300-ohm flat

ribbon cable

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

m Connecting the AM loop antenna

1.Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole.

2.Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3.Return the tab back to the original position to lock the lead

wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good

connection.

4.Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.

5.Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is

obtained.

Notes

●

The AM loop antenna should be placed apart from the main

unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall.

●

The AM loop antenna should be kept connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

PREPARATION

(U.S.A. model)

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

Antenna stand

Loop antenna

m Connecting the indoor FM antenna

Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM

ANT terminal.

Note

Do not use an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM

antenna at the same time.

GND terminal

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect

the GND terminal to a good ground. A good ground is a

metal stake driven into moist earth.

m Optional outdoor FM antenna

Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best

method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna.

The choice of the flat ribbon cable is also important. Flat ribbon

cable performs well electrically, and is cheaper and somewhat

easier to handle when routing it through windows and around

rooms. Coaxial cable is more expensive, does a much better

job of minimizing interference, is less prone to the effects of

weather and close-by metal objects, and is nearly as good a

signal conductor as flat ribbon cable. Coaxial cable is

somewhat more difficult to install at the point where the cable

enters the building. If coaxial cable is selected, make sure the

antenna is designed to be used with this type of cable.

* Use a 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (not included) or a

75-ohm antenna adapter (not included) for connections.

300-ohm flat ribbon cable 75-ohm coaxial cable

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

Notes for FM antenna installation

●

To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise,

locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible.

●

Keep the flat ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as

possible. Do not bundle or roll up an excess of the cable.

●

The antenna should be at least two meters (6.6 feet) from

reinforced concrete walls or metal structures.

300-ohm flat

ribbon cable

75-ohm coaxial

cable

75-ohm antenna

adapter

75-ohm coaxial

cable

m Optional outdoor AM antenna

If this unit is placed in steel buildings or an area far from

broadcasting stations, it may be necessary to install an outside

long wire antenna.

PREPARATION

English

•

After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord

into an AC outlet.

•

Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is

not to be used for a long period of time.

AL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

SPEAKERS

REAR

SWITCHED

AC OUTLETS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

I00W

CENTER : 6

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 4

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

CENTER : 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

: 8

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

A B

Ω

MIN. / SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

( SURROUND )

NTER

MAX. TOTAL

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

To AC outlet

(General model)

Plugging in this unit

AC OUTLET(S)

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models)

.......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

(Australia model).................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET

Use these to connect the power cords of your components to

this unit.

The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s

STANDBY/ON switch or the remote controller’s SYSTEM

POWER ON and STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply

power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on.

The maximum power (total power consumption of components)

that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is

100W.

Voltage Selector (China and General Models

only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be

set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the

AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

PREPARATION

(*1): (*2):

(*1)

(*2)

PREPARATION

If you connect your VCR, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this

unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display

program titles, parameter data and information for various

setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor

screen. This information will be superimposed over the video

image.

If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the

information will be displayed over a blue colored background.

Note: The program titles, parameter data and other

information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit.

Selecting a type of display

You can change the type of display showing various

information on the monitor screen by pressing the ON

SCREEN display key on the remote controller.

Press this key to change the screen to a full or simple display,

or no display at all.

(Example)

Full display

Simple display

Goes off after being displayed for

several seconds.

Notes

●

When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET

MENU mode, or adjusting the speaker balance by using the

test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor

screen even if another type of display is currently selected.

●

Information displayed on the monitor screen in this way

cannot be recorded by a VCR.

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

ON SCREEN

On screen display

English

PREPARATION

1. CENTER SPEAKER

Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE

Preset position: LRG

LRG: When your center speaker is approximately the same

size as the main speakers.

SML: When you use a center speaker that is smaller than

the main speakers.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position

is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”).

NONE: When you do not have a center speaker.

The center channel sound will be output from the left

and right main speakers.

2. REAR SPEAKER

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: If your rear speakers have a high ability for bass

reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear

speaker in parallel.

In this position, full range signals are output from the

rear speakers.

SMALL: If your rear speakers do not have a high ability for

bass reproduction.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position

is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”).

The following functions control the output signals to the speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all

completed, select a proper position on each function to maximize the performance of your speaker system.

* For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 56 to 59.

1. CENTER SPEAKER

2. REAR SPEAKER

3. MAIN SPEAKER

4. LFE/BASS OUT

5. MAIN LEVEL

m Function description

Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU”mode)

PREPARATION

3. MAIN SPEAKER

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: If your main speakers have a high ability for bass

reproduction.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels are output from the main speakers.

SMALL: If your main speakers do not have a high ability for

bass reproduction. However, if your system does not

include a subwoofer, do not select this position.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on

“4. LFE/BASS OUT”).

4. LFE/BASS OUT

Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH

Preset position: SW

MAIN: If your system does not include a subwoofer.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels, signals from the LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER

SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed

from other channels are output from the main

speakers.

SW/BOTH:

Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system

includes a subwoofer.

In either position, signals at LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER

SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed

from other channels are output from the

SUBWOOFER terminals.

When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN

SPEAKER”, in the SW position, no signal is

distributed from the main channels to the

SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH

position, low bass signals from the main channels

are output to both of the main speakers and the

SUBWOOFER terminals.

5. MAIN LEVEL

Choices: Normal/–10dB

Preset position: Normal

Normal: Normally, select this position.

–10dB: If the volume levels to the center and/or rear

speakers are lower than the level to the main

speakers even though they are adjusted to

maximum.

The volume level to the main speakers are

decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker

output level balance properly.

Note

The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR

SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT”

have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit.

Remote control

English

m Changing selections

Refer to the display panel or the monitor screen when changing the selections.

When using the remote controller, set the

PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU

position.

Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.

1 Turn on the power of this unit. (If necessary, turn on the

power of the monitor to display information.)

2 Select the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” by using

one of the following methods.

3 Use one of the buttons figured below to select the

desired position.

4 Follow the same procedure for “2. REAR SPEAKER”,

“3. MAIN SPEAKER”, “4. LFE/BASS OUT” and/or

“5. MAIN LEVEL”.

First select the function by following step 2, and then

select the proper position by following step 3.

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY/ON

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SPEAKERS

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

EXT. DEC.

EFFECT

ON/OFF

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Set to

“SET MENU”.

2, 3

Remote control

SYSTEM

POWER ON

PREPARATION

Front panel

LEVEL

SET

Press once

or more.

SPEAKERS

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

Changes.

Front panel

LEVEL

SET

Press once

or more.

Set to the “

∞

” position.

2 Turn on the power.

3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding

indicator will be illuminated.

* Both speakers A and B can be selected.

Set to the “0” position.

Set to the “OFF ( )”.

6 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the

remote controller to the PARAMETER position.

7 Press the TEST key on the remote controller to enter

the test mode.

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test

tone generator. After the adjustments, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker.

This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic

Surround decoder and the DTS decoder.

The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote controller.

Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

LR55

VOLUME

–dB

STANDBY/ON

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

53 4

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

V-AUX

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Front panel

Remote control

SYSTEM

POWER ON

CONTINUED

PARAMETER

SET MENU

Speaker balance adjustment

PREPARATION

SPEAKERS

English

8 Turn up the volume.

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main

speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main

speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear

speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes

as shown below.

* The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor screen by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

* If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU

mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the

center channel test tone from the left and right main

speakers.

9 Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound

output level of the left main speaker and the right main

speaker are the same.

10 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker

and the rear speakers so that they become almost

the same as the main speakers.

How to adjust:

Pressing the + or – key adjusts the level to the speaker

(except the main speakers) currently outputting the test

tone.

* Pressing the + key raises and the – key lowers the

level.

* While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected

speaker.

If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test

tone by pressing the or key once or more so that

“CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the

display.

* While holding the or key pressed, the test tone

is fixed on the selected speaker.

* “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected,

“R SUR.” shows the right rear speaker, and “L SUR.”

shows the left rear speaker.

* The output level of the selected speaker can be

adjusted by the + or – key.

MUTE

BALANCE

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

EFFECT

ON/OFF

THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

CONTINUED

PREPARATION

Main (L)

Main (R)

Center

Rear (L)

Rear (R)

TEST DOLBY SUR.

EFFECT LEVEL

CENTER 2dB

11 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST

key once again to cancel the test tone.

Notes

●

Once you have completed these adjustments, you can

adjust the sound level on your audio system by using the

VOLUME control (or the MASTER VOLUME keys on the

remote controller) only.

●

If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use

their volume controls to obtain proper balance.

●

If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU

mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 10, the sound

output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.

This is because in this mode, the center sound is

automatically output from the left and right main speakers.

●

If there is insufficient sound output from the center and

rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker

output level by setting the function “5. MAIN LEVEL” in

the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position.

Remote control

Disappears.

TEST

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

PREPARATION

English

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

Set to the “

∞

” position.

2 Turn on the power.

3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding

indicator will be illuminated.

Front panel

* Both speakers A and B can be selected.

4 Select an input source.

(For video sources, turn on the TV/monitor.)

The selected source is shown on the display panel and

the monitor screen.

Name of the selected input source

To select the source connected to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals, press the EXT. DECODER

button. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the

display. (Refer to page 37 for details.)

VOLUME

–dB

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

DVD/LD

SPEAKERS

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE/MD

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 2

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Front panel

Remote control

SYSTEM

POWER ON

BASIC OPERATION

Playing a source

SPEAKERS

CONTINUED

BASIC OPERATION

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 2

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

5 The current input mode is also shown for a source that

inputs two or more types of signals to this unit.

To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button

on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently

selected source on the remote controller. (Refer to page 38

for details on switching the input mode.)

6 Play the source. (Refer to page 43 for details on

tuning.)

Adjust the output level.

8 Adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc.

(Refer to page 42) and use the digital

sound field processor. (Refer to pages 47–49.)

Front panel

Remote control

Input mode

INPUT MODE

DVD/LD

SPEAKERS

TAPE/MD

TUNER

PHONO

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

English

When you finish using this unit

Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel or the

STANDBY key on the remote controller to enter the standby

mode.

To select the source connected to this unit’s

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as

the input source.

Press the EXT. DECODER button. “EXT. DECODER” will

appear on the display.

Note

The input source selected in this way has priority over any

other input source already selected.

To select another input source, press the EXT. DECODER

button again so that “EXT. DECODER” goes off from the

display, and then use the INPUT SELECTOR.

Notes on input source selection

●

Note that selecting an input source means that the source

which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on

the rear panel is selected.

* To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX

terminals on the front panel, select “V-AUX”.

●

The setting of the EXT. DECODER button cannot be

canceled by selecting another input source. To cancel it,

press the EXT. DECODER button again so that “EXT.

DECODER” goes off from the display.

●

If you select a video input source without canceling the

setting of the EXT. DECODER button, you will see the

picture of the video input source and hear the sound of the

source selected by the EXT. DECODER button.

●

If a different audio source is selected with the input selector

keys on the remote controller while enjoying a video source,

the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard,

but the picture from the video source can still be seen.

●

When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the

state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the

same input source was last selected will be automatically

recalled.

●

If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit

playing back a source is not operating correctly, “INPUT

DATA ERR” appears on the display.

Front panel

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY

Remote control

EXT. DEC.

BASIC OPERATION

v For CD, TAPE/MD and TV/DBS sources:

The following three input modes are provided.

AUTO:

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power of this unit.

In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the

following order of priority.

1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal

digital input signals (PCM)

2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

* For a CD source, if digital signals are input from both of the

OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from

the COAXIAL terminal is selected.

DTS:

In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is

selected even though other signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even

though digital signals are input at the same time.

Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals

instead of digital input signals.

v For DVD/LD source:

The following five input modes are provided.

AUTO:

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power to this unit.

In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected by the

following order of priority.

1. Dolby Digital RF signal (DOLBY DIGITAL)

2. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal

digital input signals (PCM)

3. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

D.D.RF:

In this mode, only Dolby Digital RF signal is selected.

DTS:

In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are

selected even though other signals are input at the same time.

DGTL:

In this mode, only digital input signals (DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS

or PCM) are selected even though other types of signals are

input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even

though other types of signals are input at the same time.

BASIC OPERATION

AUTO:

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power of this unit.

In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the

following order of priority.

1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal

digital input signals (PCM)

2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

* For CD and DVD/LD sources, if digital signals are input

from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the

digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected.

DTS:

In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is

selected even though other signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even

though digital signals are input at the same time.

Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals

instead of digital input signals.

m Switching the input mode

This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit.

China, Singapore and General models

U.S.A., Canada and Australia models

The following three input modes are provided.

Notes on input mode selection

●

The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with

function “12. TV/DBS INPUT” in the SET MENU mode.

This unit will be automatically set to the selected input mode

when the power is turned on.

●

Set the input mode to the following mode to play a DVD/LD

source encoded with Dolby Digital.

U.S.A., Canada and Australia models: AUTO

China, Singapore and General models: AUTO or D.D.RF

●

Select the ANALOG mode to play a normal 2-channel

source with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program.

●

The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD

players in the following situation:

The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while

playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, then

disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for

a moment because the digital input signal was selected

again.

●

The input mode cannot be changed for PHONO, TUNER,

VCR 1, VCR 2 and VIDEO AUX sources because only

analog signals are used.

●

The present input mode appears on the front display and

monitor screen when the input source is changed to

DVD/LD, CD, TAPE/MD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is

changed.

The present input signal is also shown on the monitor

screen when the input mode is changed to AUTO, as shown

below.

* However, the present input signal will not be shown when

the input mode is switched during the speaker test mode.

Only AUTO will be displayed.

Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS

●

Select the DTS mode when playing an LD or CD source

encoded with DTS. (Red “dts” indicator is illuminated on

the display panel.) If the “AUTO” mode is selected, a

noise may be heard just after playback begins.

Do not play these sources in the ANALOG mode

because only background noise will be output from the

speakers.

●

This unit is automatically locked in the DTS decoding

mode when playing a CD or LD source encoded with

DTS in the AUTO mode to prevent background noise in

future operation. The red “dts” indicator will be flashing.

In this mode, no sound will be heard if a disc with normal

digital signals (PCM) is played from a CD or LD source.

To play back the disc normally, press the INPUT MODE

button on the front panel, or, the input selector key for the

current source on the remote controller.

English

BASIC OPERATION

1 Set the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector to the SOURCE

position.

2 Select the source you want to record.

3 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up

to confirm the input source. (Refer to page 43 for

details on tuning.)

4 Begin recording to the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

or VCR connected to this unit.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller.

Front panel

Remote control

TAPE/MD

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 2

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD)

to tape (or MD)

m Recording the playing source to tape (or MD)

BASIC OPERATION

English

m Recording a source to tape (or MD) while listening to (or watching) another

source

The source (except for “SOURCE”) that is selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector can be recorded to a tape deck (MD

recorder) and/or VCR, regardless of the INPUT SELECTOR setting.

1 Select the source you want to record.

2 Play the source.

3 Select the source with the INPUT SELECTOR and

adjust the VOLUME control to check the sound output.

4 Begin recording on the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

or VCR.

5 The sound and/or picture of the recording can be

monitored by selecting the tape deck (or VCR) with the

INPUT SELECTOR.

6 Selecting another source to enjoy with the INPUT

SELECTOR will not effect the recording.

Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

Front panel

Remote control

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

TAPE/MD

3, 5, 6

TAPE/MD

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 2

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

BASIC OPERATION

Notes on recording

●

The VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, the

BASS EXTENSION button and the settings of DSP have

no effect on the material being recorded.

●

Composite video and S video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected

to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal,

you can record only a S video (or only a composite video)

signal on your VCR.

●

A source that is connected to this unit between optical

digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or

VCR other than the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

connected to the OPTICAL TAPE/MD OUT terminal of this

unit.

●

A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded.

●

Please check the copyright laws in your country to record

from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of

●

Dolby Digital RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a

tape deck or VCR. To record an LD source, the LD player

must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal

input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals of

this unit.

If you play back a video source that uses scramble or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may

be a case that display information superimposed on the

picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those

signals.

BASIC OPERATION

m Adjusting the BALANCE control

Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right

speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by

speaker location or listening room conditions.

Note

This control is effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

m Using the BASS EXTENSION

button

Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency

response at the main left and right channels while maintaining

overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing

the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used.

m Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE

controls

BASS : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter-

clockwise to decrease) the low frequency

response.

TREBLE : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter

clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response.

Note

These controls are effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

m Using the TONE BYPASS button

Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and

TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting

pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone

control circuitry can be used when this button is released

outward (OFF).

BASS TREBLE

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

BALANCE

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

Sound control

English

Tuning

BASIC OPERATION

1 Select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be

illuminated.

4 Tune to the desired station manually.

* Hold down the button to continue the tuning search.

1 Select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be

illuminated.

4 Press the “UP” side once to tune in to a higher

frequency.

Press the “DOWN” side once to tune in to a lower

frequency.

* Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at

the correct station.

* Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the

correct station because the signals are weak.

Quick automatic-search tuning (automatic tuning) is effective when the station signals are strong with no interference. However,

manual tuning can be used during less-than-ideal conditions.

Note

Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the

reception to monaural to increase the signal quality.

m Automatic tuning m Manual tuning

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

MAN’L MONO

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

MAN’L MONO

DOWN

TUNING

DOWN

TUNING

Turn the “AUTO”

indicator off.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

AUTO

Basic operation

BASIC OPERATION

1 Tune to a station.

(Refer to the previous page for the tuning procedure.)

2 Select a group (A – E) of preset stations.

4 Select a preset station number (1 to 8) where you want

to program the station before the “MEMORY” indicator

goes off from the display.

* In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8.

* You can program more stations to the preset station

numbers on other groups in the same way by selecting

other groups in step 2.

11 Select the group of preset stations.

22 Select the preset station number.

Notes

• A new setting can be programmed in place of the former

one.

• For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or

monaural) is stored along with the station frequency.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data

from being lost even if this unit is set to the standby mode or

the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the

power is cut due to a temporary power failure. If, however, the

power is cut for about two weeks, the memory may be

deleted. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following

the Preset tuning steps.

m Manual preset tuning

This unit can store station frequencies selected by the tuning operation. With this function, you can recall any desired station only by

selecting the preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored.

To store stations

2, 11 3

MAN’L

AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes on and off

for about 5 seconds.

SPEAKERS

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

AUTO

0 20 100

STEREO

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A1.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

Preset tuning

To recall a preset station

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4, 22

English

2 Press and hold for more than 3 seconds

To tune to higher frequencies, press the “UP” side once.

To tune to lower frequencies, press the “DOWN” side once.

* If the TUNING button is not pressed, in a while, the

automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher

frequencies.

The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed. Received stations are programmed to

A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially.

* If more than 8 stations are received, they are also

programmed to the preset station numbers on other groups

(B, C, D and E) in that order.

If you want to store the first received station to the

desired preset station number.

If, for example, you want to store the first received station to

C5, select “C5” by using the A/B/C/D/E button and the preset

station number selector buttons after pressing the MEMORY

button in step 2. Then press the TUNING button. The first

received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ...

sequentially.

If stations are stored up to E8, the automatic preset tuning is

finished automatically.

When the automatic preset tuning is finished

The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.

Check the contents and the number of preset stations by

following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset

station” on page 44.

To recall a preset station

Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset

station” on page 44.

A recalled station is shown by the frequency on the display.

Notes

●

You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM

station manually by simply following the procedure of the

section “To store stations” on page 44.

●

If the number of received stations is not enough to be stored

up to E8, the search will be finished automatically after

searching all frequencies.

●

With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal

strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to

program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural

manually and program it by following the procedure of the

section “To store stations” on page 44.

m Automatic preset tuning

You can make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations. With this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and

stores FM stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual

preset tuning method on page 44.

To store stations

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

DOWN

TUNING

BASIC OPERATION

Flashes

MAN’L

AUTO FM

MEMORY

SPEAKERS

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

MEMORY

AUTO

0 20 100

STEREO

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

BASIC OPERATION

m Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below.

Example)

If you want to exchange the preset stations on E1 and A5 with

each other.

1 Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the

method of “To recall a preset station” on page 44).

3 Recall the preset station on A5 by following the same

method with step 1.

Shows the exchange of stations is completed.

2, 4

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

SPEAKERS

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

MEMORY

0 20 100

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

Flashes.

EDIT

MEMORY

EDIT

English

Using digital sound field processor (DSP)

Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP)

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 2

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand

and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your

listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend

on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments.

In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound

reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded

with DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined

operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic Surround or DTS.

This unit has 10 programs for digital sound field processing; 5 programs for Audio sources and 5 programs for Audio/Video sources.

In addition, some programs have two subprograms. All programs contain parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste.

For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 52 to 55.

1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “Playing a source” on pages 35 to 36.

2 When operating on the front panel:

If no program name is illuminated on the display panel,

press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound

field processor so that a name of a DSP program

appears on the display panel and the monitor screen.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

When operating on the remote controller:

Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the

PARAMETER position.

Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

CONTINUED

EFFECT

BASIC OPERATION

3 Select a program that is suitable for the source.

The name of the selected program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen.

●

djust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 50 and 51.)

●

You can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 60 to 64.)

Notes

●

Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected

at this time. So, when you select the same input source the next time, the same program will be automatically recalled.

●

If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround

sound effect.

●

When a monaural sound source is played with the program PRO LOGIC (Normal/Enhanced), a proper effect will not be

obtained. Moreover, sound may become unnatural depending on the settings of the speaker output modes (1. CENTER

SPEAKER to 4. LFE/BASS OUT) in the SET MENU mode.

●

When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is

considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels

may produce an unnatural effect.

●

When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used

and the EFFECT button also will not function.

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Press once or more.

b) For the programs No. 8, 9 and 10 only, you can select

the desired subprogram by pressing the

corresponding DSP program selector key once or

more.

PROGRAM

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 2

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VO UME

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller:

BASIC OPERATION

DSP

SPEAKERS

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

MOVIE THEATER 1

Subprogram name Program name

DSP

SPEAKERS

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

Program name

English

m To enjoy a video source encoded

with Dolby Pro Logic Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS

When you select the program No. 8, 9 or 10, and the input

signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic

Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the

input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby

Digital is automatically decoded.

When some program is selected and the input signal of the

source is encoded with DTS, DTS is automatically decoded.

The following indicators on the display panel show you what

sound processing is being made.

1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played

back and DTS is decoded.

2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with

DTS is played back and DTS is decoded.

3 Lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the

signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is

not in 2-channels.

4 Lights up when Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being

decoded.

5 Lights up when Digital Sound Field Processor is turned

on.

The display panel or the monitor screen will show the selected

subprogram according to the type of the decoding.

Notes

●

Dolby Digital will not be decoded if the source that is not

encoded with Dolby Digital.

DTS will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded

with DTS.

●

If the input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital

are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is

similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals.

●

The indicator 3 will also light up when the input mode is set

to “D.D.RF” even if no signal encoded with Dolby Digital is

input to this unit.

Note

If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS

decoded to another disc not encoded with DTS when the red

“dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected

disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator

flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding

mode.

To play back the disc normally, change the current DTS-

decoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector

key on the remote controller or the INPUT MODE button on

the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off.

m To cancel the effect sound

The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF

key on the remote controller make it simple to compare the

normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound.

To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound,

press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press

the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time

to restore the effect sound.

Notes

●

If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with

Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, signals of all

channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers.

●

If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed

to turn effect sounds off when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not

output normally depending on a source. In that case, press the

EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key to turn effect

sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with Dolby

Digital or DTS.

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

Front panel

Remote control

EFFECT

ON/OFF

BASIC OPERATION

Speakers

CENTER

RIGHT SURROUND (R SUR.)

LEFT SURROUND (L SUR.)

SUBWOOFER (SWFR)

Preset value

Control range (dB)

MIN, –20 to +10

MIN, –20 to 0

Notes

●

Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the

same in all the digital sound field programs.

●

The value of each speaker output level you set the last time

will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby

mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected for more than

one week, these values will be automatically changed to the

factory default settings.

●

If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU

mode is set in the “NONE” position, the center speaker

output level cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this

mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left

and right main speakers.

●

When one of the DSP programs No. 1 to 5 is selected, the

center speaker output level cannot be adjusted.

Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and

subwoofer

You can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker

even if the output level is already set in “Speaker balance

adjustment” on pages 32 to 34.

BASIC OPERATION

CENTER

R SUR.

L SUR.

SWFR

(Center speaker output level)

(Right rear speaker output level)

(Left rear speaker output level)

(Subwoofer output level)

English

BASIC OPERATION

1 Select the speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust by using one of the following methods.

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller:

Press a button repeatedly until the name of the desired speaker(s) appears on the display.

2 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s).

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make adjustments on the other speaker(s).

LEVEL

m Method of adjustment

Press once

or more.

Press once

or more.

Press once

or more.

Press once.

EXT. DEC.

EFFECT

ON/OFF

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

SYSTEM

POWER ON

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

LEVEL

SET

LEVEL

SET

Set to

“PARAMETER.”

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

1, 2

When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switich to the PARAMETER position.

Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of

these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual

locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment.

Note

The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are

listening in. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments.

m Program No. 1 to 5: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources)

●

When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )

Speaker output: main, rear

●

When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )

Speaker output: main, center, rear

●

When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )

Speaker output: main, center, rear

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

Brief overview of digital sound field programs

BASIC OPERATION

FEATURE

In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the

main speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience.

Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big

church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides.

This interior produces very long reverberations.

This is a small, cozy jazz club with a low ceiling. The sound is

very close and intimate.

This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will

experience a very dynamic or lively sound field.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and

highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy,

“immediate” sound.

PROGRAM

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

DISCO

No.

English

m Program No. 6 to 10: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources)

●

These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder.

●

Speaker output: main, center, rear

Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from

the center speaker(s).

●

For program No. 6 and 7 only, indicators light up as follows.

When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )

When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )

When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

BASIC OPERATION

FEATURE

This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the

sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear

surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This

program is the most suitable for sports programs.

This program is designed specifically to enhance mono

source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the

sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly

forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the

overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old

mono movies, news broadcasts and dialog.

PROGRAM

TV SPORTS

MONO MOVIE

No.

FEATURE

Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie

theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in

detail, giving both the video and the sound field

incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded

with Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale

movie productions) are ideal for use with this program.

Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest

sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a

broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence.

You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space

sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

and DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the

newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be

similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the

reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as

much as possible. The data of the sound field of an

opera house are used for the front presence side, so the

three dimensional feeling of the sound field is

emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the

screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert

hall on the rear surround side, powerful reverberations

are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure

movies, etc. with much presence.

This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track

film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound

field. The front presence side of the sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and

toward the screen, restraining echo effect of

conversations without losing clarity. For the surround

side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully

in a wide space at the rear of the sound field.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

8 MOVIE 70 mm Spectacle

THEATER 1 ()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL Spectacle

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Spectacle

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

70 mm Sci-Fi

()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL Sci-Fi

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Sci-Fi

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

9 MOVIE 70 mm Adventure

THEATER 2 ()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL Adventure

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Adventure

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

70 mm General

()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DGTL General

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS General

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

●

Program No. 8 to 9 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby

Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).

BASIC OPERATION

English

FEATURE

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby

Digital decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces

sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby

Surround or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient

decoding process improves crosstalk and channel

separation and makes sound positioning smoother and

more precise.

Ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of

the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing

and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding

are precisely performed without altering the originally

designed sound orientation. The surround effects

produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from

the rear to the left and right and toward the screen.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

10 /DTS PRO LOGIC/Normal ()

SURROUND Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal ()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

PRO LOGIC/Enhanced

()

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby

Digital in 2 channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR./Enhanced

()

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with DTS.

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

●

Program No. 10 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing

the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED FEATURES

1. CENTER SPEAKER

2. REAR SPEAKER

3. MAIN SPEAKER

4. LFE/BASS OUT

5. MAIN LEVEL

6. DOLBY DGTL SET

LFE LEVEL

7. DOLBY DGTL SET

DYNAMIC RANGE

8. DTS SET

LFE LEVEL

19. CENTER DELAY

10. PARAMETER INI

11. MEMORY GUARD

12.TV/DBS INPUT

13. DIMMER

m Changes and adjustments

The following 13 functions maximize the performance of your system and increase the enjoyment of audio listening and video watching.

“SET MENU”mode

● Refer to the information in the display panel or monitor screen during operation. The monitor power must be turned on to display

information on the monitor.

● When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position.

Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX V995

SPEAKERS

PHONES

OFF

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

–dB

BASS

EXTENSION

TONE

BYPASS

LEVEL EFFECT

SET

PROGRAM

2345678

MEMORY EDIT

FM/AM

DOWN

TUNING

INPUT MODE

TUNING

MODE

MAN’L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN’L MONO

PRESET

kHz

MHz

MEMORY

SLEEPAUTO

TAPE 2 MONITOR

DIGITAL

STEREO

l00

ROOM 2 CONTROL

NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM

40 60

SPEAKERS

RT PS

PTY

PTY HOLD

EON

NEWS

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

PCM AC

—

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

AUTO TUNING

SPEAKERS

ROOM 2

ENHANCED

EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

CINEMA DSP

VCR 2

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT/ZONE 2

VCR 1

TV/DBS

PHONO

TUNER

CDDVD/LD

SOURCE

TAPE/MD

1 To make changes, select the applicable function by using one of the following methods.

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller:

2 Select the desired position or edit parameter for the function by using the following keys.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change a setting or adjust for another function.

Press once or more.

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

V-AUX

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Press once or more.

LEVEL

SET

LEVEL

SET

Set to “SET MENU”

English

ADVANCED FEATURES

1. CENTER SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 5. MAIN LEVEL

2. REAR SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT

(Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system)

Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change, unless your

speaker system is modified.)

m Function description

6. DOLBY DGTL SET

LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel]

●

Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB

Preset value: 0 dB

●

This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is

decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded

with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other

channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio

of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5

for details about the LFE channel.)

●

Choices: MAX/STD/MIN

Preset position: MAX

●

This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is

decoded.

“Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level

and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie

originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide

dynamic range.

Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into

a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged.

Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not

always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of

your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase

the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in

a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of

source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost

among noises in your environment.

Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an

original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format

by “compressing” the data of sound.

MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital

is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide

dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds

like a movie theater.

Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can

listen to a source in a high output level in a room

specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.

STD (Standard):

In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital

is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of

the source suitable for low level listening.

MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than

in the STD position. Selecting this position will be

effective when you must listen to a source in an

extremely low level.

* In this position, it may happen that sound is output

faintly or not output normally depending on a

source. In that case, select the MAX or STD

position.

7. DOLBY DGTL SET

DYNAMIC RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range)

ADVANCED FEATURES

9. CENTER DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)]

●

Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step)

Preset value: 0 ms

●

This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or

DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source

encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center

channel signals.

Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main

channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel).

The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated.

In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to

your listening position may be shorter than the distance from

the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that

case, sounds from the left main, center and right main

speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by

delaying the sound from the center speaker.

10. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program)

You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program.

Note that some DSP programs have two subprograms; all

parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this

operation.

Initializing method

Use the remote controller for the operation.

A program number whose parameters has been changed is

marked with “

”. Press a DSP program selector key which

corresponds to the program number whose parameters you

want to initialize. When initialized, the “

” mark will disappear.

8. DTS SET

LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel]

●

Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB

Preset value: 0 dB

●

This adjustment is effective only when DTS is decoded and

the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS

contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other

channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio

of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5

for details about the LFE channel.)

English

12. TV/DBS INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the source connected to the

TV/DBS input terminals)

For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this

unit, you can designate the input mode that is automatically

selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always

selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the

last time is memorized and will not be changed even if

the power of this unit is switched off.

* Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode.

13. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel)

You can adjust the brightness of the display panel in five

degree increments.

11. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments)

If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters

and other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position,

they are locked and cannot be changed. The following

functions on this unit can be locked by this operation.

• DSP parameters

• Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode

• ON SCREEN display key

• LEVEL key

• TEST key

ADVANCED FEATURES

What is a sound field?

In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we

need to first understand what a sound field really is.

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are

the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition

to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell

where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the

room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is

highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more

absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains.

The elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two

distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the

sound field:

(1) Early Reflections.

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a

wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown

in the diagram on page 62 for any particular environment,

and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections

actually add clarity to the direct sound.

(2) Reverberations.

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation

taken together help us to determine the subjective size and

shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would

be able to create your own listening environment. The

acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert

hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability

to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done

with the DSP.

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to

the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are

preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create

the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to

use DSP programs without changing values of parameters,

however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound

fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust

those parameters. Even if the power cord of this unit is

disconnected from the AC outlet, your custom sound fields will

remain in the DSP’s memory for about two weeks. The

following page details how to make your own sound fields.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to

change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to

precisely create the effect you want. For the programs which

have subprograms, each subprogram has a set of parameters.

These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic

factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual

concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the

room, for example, affects the length of time between the

“early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced

reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE”

parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the

timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of

the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the

room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant

effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for

example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out

quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to

carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow

you to control these and many other factors that contribute to

your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially

“redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create

custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your

mood and music.

Refer to “Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters” on

pages 62 to 64 for a description of what each parameter does,

how it effects the sound, and its control range.

Creating your own sound fields

ADVANCED FEATURES

English

m Selecting and editing program parameters

This adjustment can be made only by using the remote controller and watching the monitor screen or the display panel.

Note

Information on the monitor screen would be

easier to see than the display panel.

1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the

PARAMETER position.

Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open.

2 Turn your monitor on. If the currently selected type of

display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN

display key and select the full display.

3 If no DSP program is selected, select a desired

program.

The selected program name and its parameters will be

displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped

cursor points to the first parameter or subprogram name.

4 If necessary, select the desired subprogram.

Press the button for

the currently selected

program once or more.

5 Select the parameter which you want to edit.

6 Change the value on the selected parameter to create

the effect you want.

“+” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “–”

decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases

you can hold the key down to quickly move to the desired

value.

The display will pause for a moment at the initial set value of

the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, the

mark at the head of the parameter name will disappear upon

reaching the initial set value of the parameter.)

Notes

●

For details about parameters, refer to pages 62 to 64.

●

Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even

if power is lost due to a power failure or the power plug is

disconnected from the AC outlet for about two weeks, after

which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or

setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values

or conditions.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

Subprogram

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

V AUX

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

ADVANCED FEATURES

4, 5, 6

3, 4

m Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters

Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

●

ROOM SIZE

How it Affects the Sound:

Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger

the value, the larger the simulated room will sound.

What it Does:

Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early

reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before

the subsequent, dense reverberation begins.

Control Range:

0.1 – 2.0

Standard setting is 1.0.

Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent

volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all

doubled).

P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size)

Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound

field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between

reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound

source.

S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size)

Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field.

The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field

becomes.

●

INIT. DELAY (Initial Delay)

How it Affects the Sound:

Changes the apparent distance from the source sound.

Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective

surface determines the delay between the direct sound and

the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the

sound source within the acoustic environment.

What it Does:

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first

reflection heard by the listener.

Control Range:

1 – 99 milliseconds

For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small

value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an

echo effect.

P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the

later the first reflection begins.

Control Range:

1 – 99 milliseconds

S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value,

the later the first reflection begins.

Control Range:

1 – 49 milliseconds

INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Small space

Small

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Large

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Large space

Level

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Early reflections

ADVANCED FEATURES

English

●

LIVENESS

How it Affects the Sound:

This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls

in the hall.

The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity

(decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent

wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective

surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the

early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room

with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay

rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you

adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness”

of the room.

What it Does:

Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay.

Control Range:

0 – 10.

LIVENESS (Presence Liveness)

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence

sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front

presence sound field becomes.

S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness)

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround

sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear

surround sound field becomes.

●

REV.TIME (Reverberation Time)

How it Affects the Sound:

The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily

on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This

parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the

acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

What it Does:

Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense,

subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz).

Control Range:

1.0 – 5.0 seconds.

The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be

between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2

and 3.

REV. TIME

60 dB

REV. TIME

60 dB

REV. TIME

60 dB

Level

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Dead Live

Level

Reverberations Reverberations Reverberations

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Early reflections

ADVANCED FEATURES

●

REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level)

This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control Range:

0 – 100%

●

S. DELAY (Surround Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the

later the surround sound field is generated.

Control Range:

When Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded:

15 – 30 milliseconds

When Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded:

0 – 15 milliseconds

When a program without Dolby Surround or DTS

encoded is used:

15 – 49 milliseconds

REV. LEVEL

Level

Direct sound

Time

ADVANCED FEATURES

English

1 Select the source using the INPUT SELECTOR and

start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the

source unit.

2 Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until the desired

SLEEP time appears on the display.

* “SLEEP time” is the time that elapses before this unit

is automatically turned into the standby mode.

Each time you press the SLEEP key, the SLEEP time

changes as follows.

After a while, the display returns to the original indication.

To cancel the SLEEP timer

Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears

on the display. (After a while, the display returns to the original

indication.)

Note

The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting this

unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on

the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote controller)

or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet.

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

SLEEP

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

SLEEP

Use the built-in SLEEP timer to automatically turn this unit into the standby mode after the time you set elapses. The SLEEP timer is

useful when you plan to fall asleep while this unit is playing back or recording a source. The SLEEP timer also automatically turns off

external units connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear of this unit. The SLEEP timer can only be set using the

remote controller.

To set the SLEEP time

120 90 60 30

SLEEP OFF

(The SLEEP timer is off.)

(Minutes)

Indicates the SLEEP time.

Flashes.

SPEAKERS

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE/MD

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2

SLEEP

Setting the SLEEP timer

ADVANCED FEATURES

The remote controller is designed to control the most commonly used functions. If the CD player, tape deck, LD player, etc. is a

YAMAHA component with remote control compatibility, this remote controller will also control various functions.

* For basic operations, the cover must be opened.

m Key name and function

MACROQUICK

OFFSLOW

A/B

REC/PAUSE

EFFECT

ON/OFF

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

V-AUX

DVD/LD

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

TV/DBS

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

View with the Side view

cover opened.

REMOTE CONTROLLER

Basic operation (Cover is open)

The remote controller can operate the main unit as well as other Yamaha audio and video components. The Macro feature allows

you to program a series of functions in sequence onto a single key, or you can use one of the preset macros to operate other

Yamaha components in your home theater. This remote controller also has a sophisticated Learn feature that allows it to acquire

functions from other remote controllers you use with other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped

with infrared remote control receivers. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote controllers in your

listening room.

English

REMOTE CONTROLLER

1 TAPE/MD keys

These keys control tape decks or MD recorders.

The A/B/C switch (

I) should be set to the “A” position to

control tape decks, and “C” position for MD recorders.

* The DIR A, B and A/B keys apply only to double cassette

tape decks.

* Pressing the DIR A key will reverse the tape direction on a

single cassette tape deck with the automatic reverse

function.

* The and keys work as follows.

For tape decks:

: Rewinds a tape.

: Advances a tape fast.

For MD recorders:

: Locates the beginning of the current or previous

track.

: Locates the beginning of the next track.

2 CD/DVD/LD player keys

These keys control compact disc players, DVD players or LD

players.

Set the A/B/C switch (

I) to the “A” position to control

compact disc players, “B” position for DVD players and “C”

position for LD players.

* The DISC key is used for disc changers only.

* The STOP key is used for DVD players and LD players only.

3 Tuner keys

Control tuners.

The A/B/C switch (

I) should be set to the “A” position.

+: Press this key to select the next preset station number.

–: Press this key to select the previous preset station

number.

A/B/C/D/E: Selects the group (A – E) of preset station

numbers.

4 DSP program selector keys

Press a key to select a DSP program when the built-in digital

sound field processor is on. Includes the Dolby Pro Logic

Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder, and DTS decoder.

5 TEST key

This key is used when adjusting the speaker balance. (Refer to

pages 32 to 34.)

6 LEVEL key

This key is used to adjust the output level of the center and

rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this key (several

times) to select the speaker(s). The name will be illuminated

on the display. Then press the + or – keys (

) to change the

output level.

7 PARAMETER/SET MENU switch

Set this switch to “PARAMETER” to edit a DSP program

parameter. Set to “SET MENU” to adjust or make changes in a

function in the SET MENU mode.

8 SLEEP timer key

Press this key to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and

set the SLEEP time. (Refer to page 65.)

9 ON SCREEN display key

Press this key to change the type of display on the monitor

screen. Three types of displays are available.

Each time the key is pressed, the information can be changed

to a full, simple and no display.

0 SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys

Press the SYSTEM POWER ON key to turn on the power.

Press the STANDBY key to set this unit in the standby mode.

A RESET button

This button is inside the battery compartment.

Press this button to reset the internal microcomputer for

controling remote control operations. This button is used when

the remote controller “freezes”.

* Learned functions will not be erased when this button is

pressed.

B MASTER VOLUME (up) and (down) keys

Press these keys to increase or decrease the volume.

C MUTE key

Press this key to mute the volume. The volume can be

returned to the original level by pressing any remote controller

key which controls this unit.

The indicator on the VOLUME control flashes during the mute

mode.

D / and –/+ keys

The (up) and (down) keys change the parameters or

functions according to the mode selected by the

PARAMETER/SET MENU switch. The – and + keys adjust or

make changes in the parameter or function.

E EFFECT ON/OFF key

Press this key to turn on/off the digital sound field processor,

which includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby

Digital decoder and DTS decoder.

F EXT. DEC. key

Press this key to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function

takes priority over the input selector key setting. “EXT.

DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel.

The source selected with the input selector keys becomes the

current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated

on the display panel.

G Input selector keys

Press a key to select the input source.

H A/B/C indicators

One of these indicators will turn to red depending on the

position of the A/B/C switch.

I A/B/C switch

Normally this switch is set to the “A” position. Use the “B”

position to control a Yamaha DVD player with the CD/DVD/LD

player keys (

). Use the “C” position to control a Yamaha LD

player with the CD/DVD/LD player keys (

), or control a

Yamaha MD recorder with the TAPE/MD keys (

J TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

This indicator will be illuminated when a key is pressed on the

remote controller. (Transmitting infrared signals.)

Note

The functions of the keys to control other Yamaha

components are the same as the corresponding keys on

those components. Refer to those components’ instruction

manuals for details.

RESET button

REMOTE CONTROLLER

This is a learning remote controller. The shaded keys in the illustration shown below can be programmed to “learn” control

functions from other remote controllers. This unit can be used in place of other remote controllers by learning their functions. It will

be much convenient for you to operate various audio and video components.

Some of the “learning-capable” keys are originally empty and others have already been preset with functions to control this unit and

other Yamaha components. You can store new functions to them (in place of preset functions) as desired.

* See page 74 for the learning method.

* See page 76 for clearing a learned function (or all learned functions).

Note

If the memory capacity of the remote controller becomes full, no further learning is possible even if some learning-capable keys are

not occupied with new functions. If, for example, you store Yamaha codes only into this remote controller, up to about 20 functions

can be stored. Therefore, we recommend that only required functions be stored.

Keys which can have three functions (1, 2, 3, 4)

In the “Learning-capable” keys, the keys numbered 1–4 in the

illustration on the left can have three functions. This is because they

have three memory areas (A, B and C). (One function per area.)

You can store new functions into the area B and C, and use three

functions on a key by switching the memory areas with the A/B/C

switch. (Area A cannot learn a new function.)

To use these keys:

1. Before using a key, select area A, B or C of the key on which the

function you want to use is stored by using the A/B/C switch.

2. Press the key.

The default settings of these keys are as follows.

Preset with

functions for

controlling a

Yamaha tape

deck.

Preset with

functions for

controlling a

Yamaha CD

player.

(STOP is empty.)

Preset with

functions for

controlling the

built-in tuner.

Preset as the DSP

program selector

keys (1–9, 0) and

the TEST key.

(+10 is empty.)

Empty

Preset with functions

for controlling a

Yamaha DVD player

(except the models

DVD-1000 and

DVD-S700).

Empty

Preset as the DSP

program selector

keys (1–9, 0) and

the TEST key.

(+10 is empty.)

Preset with functions

for controlling a

Yamaha MD

recorder.

(A/B, DIR A and B

are empty.)

Preset with

functions for

controlling a

Yamaha LD player.

(DISC is empty.)

Empty

Preset as the DSP

program selector

keys (1–9, 0) and

the TEST key.

(+10 is empty.)

The position of A/B/C switch

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

456

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

TV/DBS

DIR

STOP DISC

REC/PAUSE

A/B

JAZZ CLUB

123

SPORTS

THEATER 1

MOVIE

MONO

THEATER 2

MOVIE

CONCERT DISCO

ROCK

456

HALL CHURCH

789

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

A/B/C switch

Cover is open.

(

1): These buttons are used for learning a new function

or clearing a learned function (or all learned

functions). For details, refer to pages 74 to 76 .

(

Using the “learning-capable” keys (Cover is open)

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

DVD/LD

TV/DBS

VCR 2

V-AUX

English

Notes

• Area A cannot learn a new function. To store a new function,

store it onto area B or C.

• If a key which has a preset function learns a new function,

the preset function will not work but is not deleted. When the

learned function is cleared, the preset function is restored.

(For information on clearing a learned function, refer to page

76.)

Empty keys (1, 2)

These are empty keys. Each key can learn a function from

another remote controller.

For example, the TV key is useful for storing the function of

your TV’s power switch, and the VCR key can be used for your

VCR’s power switch.

About the marks on the remote controller

An input selector key and other control keys which have the

same mark will work for the same input source.

These marks are also helpful for storing new functions.

Examples)

• Area B of keys 1 is suitable for storing functions to control

your VCR.

• Area B of keys 3 is suitable for storing functions to control

your TV/BS tuner.

Mark Meaning

Tape (Tape deck, VCR, etc.)

Disc (CD player, LD player, etc.)

Radio wave (Tuner, TV/BS tuner, etc.)

REMOTE CONTROLLER

To record new functions

It is recommended that you write down stored key functions

on the provided user function stickers and paste them on the

reverse side of the remote controller or the reverse side of

the remote controller’s cover.

Memory back-up

All of the learned functions will be retained while you

replace the batteries. However, if no batteries are

installed for a few hours, the learned functions will be

erased and will have to be learned again.

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

REMOTE CONTROLLER

When the cover of the remote controller is closed, you can easily operate Yamaha components including learned functions by using

the OPERATION CONTROL keys.

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

TV/DBS

VCR

MUTE

MASTER

VOLUME

OPERATION

CONTROL

EFFECT

TRANSMIT

A/B

REC/PAUSE

EFFECT

ON/OFF

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACROMACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

JAZZ CLUB

123

MOVIE THEATER 1

MONO

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

THEATER 2

MOVIE

456

HALL CHURCH

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

TV/DBS

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

( )

MOVIE

DISCO

+10

Input selector keys

OPERATION CONTROL keys

Cover is closed.

When the cover is closed, the OPERATION CONTROL keys

substitute for the keys numbered 1, 2 or 3 and the

(+10) keys on the above illustration. To use these keys, you do

not have to switch the A/B/C switch. The functions of the

OPERATION CONTROL keys are determined by the input

selector key pressed before using the OPERATION

CONTROL keys.

Note

Whether the cover is opened or closed, the EFFECT,

MASTER VOLUME, MUTE, TV and VCR keys will not change

their functions.

* If the MACRO switch on the side of the remote controller is

set to “OFF”, the SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY

keys will not also change their functions whether the cover

is opened or closed.

(

1): This key is originally empty. If this key has a learned

function, pressing this key executes the learned function.

Using OPERATION CONTROL keys (Cover is closed)

(

English

REMOTE CONTROLLER

Notes

• If an OPERATION CONTROL key is substituted for a key which has no function (empty), then a command will not be carried out.

Depending on your plan, store functions from other remote controllers into an empty area of those keys. (Refer to page 74 for the

learning method.)

• While playing an audio/video unit, if you want to operate another unit by using the remote controller (for example, if you want to

rewind a videotape while listening to a CD), you should open the cover of the remote controller and use the A/B/C switch and the

corresponding keys.

(If you press an input selector key with the cover closed to change the functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys to the

functions for controlling a VCR, the input of currently playing CD source is canceled.)

Examples of operations controlled by using the

OPERATION CONTROL keys

To operate a Yamaha CD player

1. Press the “CD” input selector key.

2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the

functions in area A of keys

2.)

To operate your VCR

1. Press the “VCR” input selector key.

2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the

functions in area B of keys

1. This area is originally preset

with no function. You must store the functions related to

controlling the VCR in area B of keys

1 beforehand.)

Selected input selector key

Key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out

Functions in area A of keys

1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)

Functions in area A of keys

2 (except STOP, DISC, and )

Functions in area A of keys

3 and (+10)

Functions in area B of keys

1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)

Functions in area B of keys

2 (except STOP, DISC, and )

Functions in area B of keys

3 and (+10)

Functions in area C of keys

1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)

Functions in area C of keys

2 (except STOP, DISC, and )

Functions in area C of keys

3 and (+10)

See the table below for a combination of an input selector key and key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out.

(Also, refer to the table on page 68.)

Pressing the “PHONO” or “EXT. DEC.” input selector key has no effect on the OPERATION CONTROL keys.

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

TV/DBS

OPERATION

CONTROL

Play

Skip to

previous track

Skip to next

track

Pause or Stop

OPERATION

CONTROL

Play

Rewind Fast forward

Pause or Stop

REMOTE CONTROLLER

Macro operations (Cover is closed)

The Macro feature makes it possible to operate a series of

functions by pressing just one key. For example, when you want

to play a CD, normally you would turn on the equipment, select

the CD input, and press the play key to start playback. Using the

Macro feature you can operate all those functions by simply

pressing the CD macro key. The preset macro keys (the input

selector keys and SYSTEM POWER ON/STANDBY keys with an

orange mark next to them) are preset with macro programs.

If you prefer, however, you can change the contents of a

macro key by storing a desired series of functions on it. You

can store up to seven functions onto a macro key. (Refer to

page 75 for making a new macro.)

Macros can be used only when the cover is closed and the

MACRO switch is set to “SLOW” or “QUICK”. (If “OFF” is

selected, no macro will function even if the cover is closed.)

Setting the MACRO switch

OFF: In this position, no macro will function even if the

cover of the remote controller is closed.

QUICK: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each

command is transmitted at 0.5 second intervals.

SLOW: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each

command is transmitted at 3 second intervals.

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

PHONO

V-AUX

EXT. DEC.

TV/DBS

VCR

MUTE

MASTER

VOLUME

OPERATION

CONTROL

EFFECT

TRANSMIT

MACROQUICK

OFFSLOW

A/B

REC/PAUSE

EFFECT

ON/OFF

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

EXT. DEC.

PHONO

TV/DBS

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

JAZZ CLUB

123

MOVIE THEATER 1

MONO

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

THEATER 2

MOVIE

456

HALL CHURCH

789

+10

DTS

SURROUND

TEST

MOVIE

DISCO

Cover is closed.

(Set the MACRO switch to

“QUICK” or “SLOW”.)

Preset macro keys

MACRO switch

English

REMOTE CONTROLLER

Macro key

1st

(Turns on this unit.)

2nd

(Selects an input source.)

3rd

(Starts playback of a source.)

“”on area A of keys

“”on area A of keys 2

–

“”on area B of keys

“”on area B of keys 2

–

“”on area C of keys

“”on area C of keys 2

–

Function of the key (and area) carried out when a macro key is pressed

Macro key

1st

Turns on this unit.

Sets this unit to the standby

mode.

2nd

Carries out the function of the

TV key.

–

3rd

Carries out the function of the

VCR key.

–

Function of the key carried out when a macro key is pressed

The Macro feature allows you to operate several remote control functions in a programmed order by pressing one macro key.

(Also, refer to the table on page 68.)

Notes

• A key in which no function is stored will carry out no

command.

• If it occurs that this unit will not receive the second command

because the internal operation of the first command takes a

long time, set the MACRO switch to the “SLOW” position.

• Once you press a macro key, this unit will not receive the

command of another key (even if it is pressed) until this unit

finishes carrying out all commands of the macro key. Take

notice of this especially when the MACRO switch is in the

“SLOW” position.

• Once you press a macro key, you must keep the remote

controller directed at the main unit’s remote control sensor

until the remote controller finishes transmitting all command

signals of the macro key.

• You can also use the OPERATION CONTROL keys while

using the macro functions.

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

PHONO

EXT. DEC.

TV/DBS

TAPE/MD

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/LD

V-AUX

PHONO

EXT. DEC.

TV/DBS

SYSTEM

POWER ON

SYSTEM

POWER ON

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

STANDBY

VCR

REMOTE CONTROLLER

m Learning a new function

1 Place this remote controller and the other remote

controller so that they face each other.

* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the

LEARN button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat

this step.

3 If necessary, select the memory area by using the A/B/C

switch on the side panel of the remote controller.

4 Press the key on this remote controller in which you will

store a new function.

* If a key which cannot learn another function is pressed, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current

mode is canceled. Repeat this step.

* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after a key is

pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly

and the mode before you began learning operations is

restored. Restart from step 2.

5 Press and hold the key (on the other remote controller)

which has the function you want to store.

When learning is finished, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

stops lighting. You can release the key. Then the indicator

begins flashing slowly.

* If a signal is not successfully received, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode

prior to step 4 is restored. Restart from step 4.

* If memory capacity is full, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

flashes rapidly to show you that learning is impossible, and

then the mode before you began learning operations is

restored.

6 Repeat steps 3–5 to store more functions.

7 When you finish the learning operation, press the

LEARN button.

Notes

●

Newly learned functions will replace previously learned

functions.

●

If there is no more room in the memory area for a function to

be learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator will flash

rapidly. In this case, even if some keys are not occupied

with functions from other remote controllers, no further

learning is possible.

●

If you close the cover while learning, and then about 5

seconds pass, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes

rapidly and the mode before beginning learning operations

is restored. Restart from step 2. However, if you open the

cover within 5 seconds, the mode before closing the cover is

restored.

●

There may occasionally be instances in which, due to the

signal-coding and modulation employed by the other remote

controller, this remote controller will not be able to “learn” its

signals.

●

When you press the LEARN, MACRO or CLEAR button, or

the RESET button inside of the battery compartment by

using a sharp-pointed thing, be careful not to damage the

button. If you will use a mechanical pencil, make sure that

the lead is retracted.

V-AUX

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

123

SPORTS

STADIUM

DISCO

456

ROCK

JAZZ CLUB

CHURCH

789

TEST

+10

Lights up.

V-AUX

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

123

ORTS

STADIUM

DISCO

CLUB

CHURCH

EST

This remote

controller

Other remote

controller

About 5–10 cm

(2–4 in.)

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Flashes slowly.

(Press by using a ball-point

pen or similar object.)

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

V-AUX

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

123

SPORTS

STADIUM

DISCO

456

OCK

JAZZ CLUB

CHURCH

TEST

Methods of learning and clearing functions

English

m Making a new macro

A new macro can be programmed onto any preset macro key in place of the factory preset functions. (See page 72 to know what

keys are preset macro keys.) You can make as many as 13 new macro keys. A macro key can learn as many as seven functions of

other keys.

Note

If you store a continuous function such as lowering the volume level, it may not work well when carried out as a part of macro.

REMOTE CONTROLLER

* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the

MACRO button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN

indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you pressed

the MACRO button is restored. Press the MACRO button

again.

2 Press a preset macro key on which you want to make a

new macro.

* If a key other than a preset macro key is pressed, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the

current mode is canceled. Repeat this step.

3 Press a key whose function you want to store as the first

function of the new macro.

* If a key whose function cannot be stored as a command of

macro is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes

rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step.

* If about 30 seconds pass before a key is pressed, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode

before you began learning operations is restored. Restart

from step 1.

4 Repeat step 3 to store the second, the third and more

functions. You can store up to seven key functions in

series as a macro.

* If the seventh key function has been learned, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode

before you began learning operations is restored. (This

shows that the key has completed learning a series of

functions as a macro.) You do not have to follow the next

step.

5 When you finish learning, press the MACRO button.

Notes

• If, for example, you store a function whose operation takes a

long time as the first command, add a command which has

no function between the first command and the second

command, or repeat the second command again.

• If you program the power on/off switching function of TV,

VCR, etc. as a part of a macro sequence, note that it

switches the current mode to the other (“on” to “off”, or “off”

to “on”).

For example, when you press the macro key, if the power of

TV, VCR, etc. is already on, the power will be turned off even

though you may not want it to do so.

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Goes off.

(When learning is finished,

this indicator lights up again.)

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Flashes slowly.

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Lights up.

SYSTEM

POWER ON

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

REMOTE CONTROLLER

1 To clear a learned key function, press the LEARN button

using a ball-point pen or similar object.

To clear a macro you made, press the MACRO button.

2 Press and hold the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen

or similar object.

3 Holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the

key whose function you want to clear until the indicator

flashes 3 times.

To clear two or more functions sequentially, do not

release the CLEAR button, and repeat this step.

Note

If you clear a learned function of a key, the key is restored by

the originally preset function. (except the keys which are

originally preset with no function.)

To Clear a Learned Function To Clear All Learned Functions

1 Select the kind of key functions all of which you want to

clear by using the MACRO switch on the side panel of

the remote controller.

OFF: Select this position if you want to clear all of the

learned functions except macros.

QUICK: Select this position if you want to clear all of the

macros you made.

SLOW: Select this position if you want to clear all of the

learned functions including macros.

2 Press the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen or

similar object.

* If one of the following is made after you press the CLEAR

button, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly

and the current mode is canceled. Press the CLEAR

button again.

• MACRO switch is switched to another position.

• Another key is pressed.

• There is no operation for about 30 seconds.

3 Press and hold the CLEAR button again. While holding

down the CLEAR button, press and hold the MASTER

VOLUME and keys simultaneously until the

indicator flashes 7 times.

MACROQUICK

OFFSLOW

m Clearing learned functions

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Flashes slowly.

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Flashes.

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Flashes slowly.

MUTE

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Flashes.

English

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

AUDIO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT

VIDEO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT

REMOTE CONTROL IN

CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE

You can make up a dual-room audio/video system with this unit. In this system, you can make this unit send audio and video

signals to the main room’s equipment (speakers and TV monitor) and the second room’s equipment (amplifier and TV monitor)

respectively. For example, you can enjoy listening to a CD source in the main room while another person is enjoying watching an

LD source in the second room.

m Connections

The following optional products are required to use the dual-

room function.

1 An infrared emitter in the main room

This emitter emits the infrared signals transmitted by the

remote controller in the second room to the other

components in the main room (for example, CD player or

LD player).

2 An amplifier, TV monitor and speakers for the second room

3 A remote controller used in the second room

4 An infrared signal receiver for the second room

Connect the ZONE 2 OUT audio output terminals of this unit to

the MAIN IN terminals (or equivalents) of the amplifier in the

second room, and connect the ZONE 2 OUT video output

terminal of this unit to the video signal input terminal of the TV

monitor in the second room.

Up to 6 units can be connected in this

connecting way.

This unit

3 Remote controller

LD player etc.

This unit

Main Room

Amplifier

TV monitor

4 Infrared signal receiver

Second Room

1 Infrared emitter

OUTINOUTOUT IN

Example of system configuration and connections

(

(*1): Some Yamaha models can be connected to this unit’s

REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminals. If you connect these

units in series, the use of an infrared emitter may not be

necessary.

Note

Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a

dual-room system, we recommend that you consult with a

custom installation specialist for connections which will best

meet your requirements.

CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE

m Listening to (and watch) a source in the second room

1 Set the VOLUME control of the amplifier in the second

room to “minimum”.

2 Select the source you will listen to and/or watch in the

second room with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector on the

front panel of this unit in the main room.

3 Play back the source.

4 Increase the volume on the amplifier in the second room.

Notes

• If you want to listen to (and watch) the same source as that

selected for the main room, set the REC OUT/ZONE 2

selector to the “SOURCE” position.

• Signals of the source selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2

selector are also sent to the tape deck, VCR, etc. connected

to this unit as signals to be recorded.

English

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the

instruction below does not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

Problem

The unit fails to turn on when the

STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns

into the standby mode suddenly soon after

the power is turned on.

This unit does not work normally.

No sound or no picture.

No picture

The sound suddenly goes off.

Only one side speaker outputs the sound.

No sound from the effect speakers.

No sound from the center speaker.

Poor bass reproduction.

Sound “hums”.

The volume level is low while playing a

record.

The volume level cannot be increased, or

sound is distorted.

Cause

Power cord is not plugged in or is not

completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the

rear panel is not set to either end.

There is an influence of strong external

noise (lightning, excessive static electricity,

etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while

using this unit.

Incorrect output cord connections.

Appropriate input source is not selected.

Speaker connections are not secure.

Digital signals other than PCM audio and

Dolby Digital (or DTS) encoded signals

which this unit cannot reproduce are input to

this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc.

There is no S video terminal connection

between this unit and the TV, though S

video signals are input to this unit.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of short circuit etc.

The SLEEP timer came on.

Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control.

Incorrect cord connections.

The EFFECT button is set off.

A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding

program is being used with material not

encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS).

The function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the

SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE”

position.

One of the DSP programs No. 1 to No. 5 is

selected when the input signal of source is

2-channel stereo (analog/PCM).

The input signals of source encoded with

Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center

channel signals.

The function “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET

MENU mode is set in the SW or BOTH

position, though your system does not

include a subwoofer.

Output mode selection for each channel

(MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper.

Incorrect cord connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the TAPE/MD

OUT terminals of this unit is turned off.

What to Do

Firmly plug in the power cord.

Set the switch to either end when this unit is

in the standby mode.

Turn this unit into the standby mode and

disconnect the AC power cord from the AC

outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed,

connect the power and operate this unit

again.

Connect the cords properly. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Select the appropriate input source with the

INPUT SELECTOR or the EXT. DECODER

button.

Secure the connections.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT

terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal.

Turn this unit into the standby mode, and

then turn on to reset the protection circuit.

Cancel the SLEEP timer function.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Connect the cords properly. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Press the EFFECT button to turn it on.

Use a different sound field program.

Select the appropriate position.

Select another program.

Refer to the instructions for the source

currently played.

Select the MAIN position.

Make output mode selections suitable for

your speaker system.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cords may be defective.

Make the GND connection between the

turntable and this unit.

The player should be connected to the unit

through the MC head amplifier.

Turn on the power to the component.

General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The remote controller does not work.

The remote controller does not function

properly.

Learning cannot be made successfully.

(The TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator does not

light up or flash.)

Continuous functions such as volume are

learned, but operate only for a moment

before stopping.

Cause

The batteries of this remote controller are

weak.

The internal microcomputer “freezes”.

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type

of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote

control sensor of the main unit.

The internal microcomputer “freezes”.

The batteries of this remote controller and/or

the other remote controller are weak.

The distance between the two remote

controllers is too far or short.

The signal coding or modulation of the other

remote controller is not compatible with this

remote controller.

Memory capacity is full.

The internal microcomputer “freezes”.

Learning process incomplete.

What to Do

Replace the batteries with new ones and

press the RESET button on the remote

controller.

Press the RESET button on the remote

controller.

The remote controller will function from a

maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30

degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Change position of the main unit.

Press the RESET button on the remote

controller.

Replace the batteries (and press the RESET

button for this remote controller).

Place the remote controllers at the proper

distance.

Learning is not possible.

Further learning is not possible without

deleting unnecessary commands.

Press the RESET button on the remote

controller.

Be sure to press and hold the function key on

the other remote controller until the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator begins flashing

slowly.

Remote controller

Problem

DSP parameters and some other settings

on this unit cannot be changed.

“INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display

and no sound is heard.

The sound field cannot be recorded.

This unit does not operate properly.

A source cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to this unit.

Noise from nearby TV or tuner.

The sound is degraded when listening with

the headphones connected to the compact

disc player or tape deck that is connected

with this unit.

Cause

The function “11. MEMORY GUARD” in the

SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position.

A nonstandardized source is played back, or

the unit playing back a source is

misoperating.

It is not possible to record the sound field on

a tape deck connected to this unit’s

TAPE/MD OUT terminals.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (lightning,

excessive static electricity, etc.) or power

supply with low voltage.

The source unit is connected to this unit

between digital terminals only.

This unit is too close to the affected

equipment.

This unit is in the standby mode.

What to Do

Set to the “OFF” position.

Check the source, or turn off the unit playing

back the source and then turn on again.

Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC

outlet, and then plug in again after about one

minute.

Make additional connection between analog

terminals.

Move the unit further away from the affected

equipment.

Turn the power to this unit on.

English

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

A loud hissing noise is heard when you

play back a source encoded with DTS.

A percussive noise is heard when you

begin playing back a source encoded with

DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source encoded with DTS, even though the

“AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected

on this unit.

No sound is heard when you play back an

MD onto which you have recorded a

source encoded with DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

DAT onto which you have recorded a

source encoded with DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source (CD etc.) even though the currently

selected input mode is “AUTO”.

Problem

FM stereo reception is noisy.

There is distortion and clear reception

cannot be obtained even with a good

FM antenna.

A desired station cannot be tuned in

with the automatic tuning method.

Previously preset stations can no

longer be tuned in.

A desired station cannot be tuned in

with the automatic tuning method.

There are continuous crackling and

hissing noises.

There are buzzing and whining noises

(especially in the evening).

Cause

The player which plays back the source is

not connected to a digital audio signal input

terminal of this unit.

The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on

this unit.

If the “AUTO” input mode is selected,

depending on some sources, there may be a

case that a noise is heard while this unit is

identifying the format of input signal.

The DTS decoder built into this unit does not

function because the player has a digital

volume control and it is set at a position

other than “maximum”, “neutral” or

“ineffective”.

A source encoded with DTS cannot be

recorded onto an MD.

Depending on a DAT deck, a source

encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto

a DAT.

In the “AUTO” mode, DTS-decoding mode

cannot be changed to the normal (PCM)

digital signal input mode automatically.

Cause

Because of the characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts, this is limited to cases where

the transmitter is too far away or the

antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

This unit has been unplugged for a long

period.

Weak signal or loose antenna connections.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent

lamps, motors, thermostats and other

electrical equipment.

A television set is being used nearby.

What to Do

The player must be connected to a digital

audio signal input terminal of this unit besides

analog audio signal terminal connections.

Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn

on the DTS decoder built into this unit.

Set the input mode of the currently selected

input source to “DTS”.

Set the player’s digital volume control at the

maximum, neutral or ineffective position.

Press the INPUT MODE button on the front

panel or the input selector button (for the

currently selected source) on the remote

controller so that “PCM” appears on the

display.

What to Do

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high quality directional FM

antenna.

Set the TUNING MODE button to the manual

tuning mode.

Adjust antenna placement to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high quality directional FM antenna.

Repeat the presetting procedure.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and rotate it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat but it is difficult to

eliminate all the noises.

Relocate this unit away from the TV.

When playing back a source encoded with DTS:

Tuner

Notes

• It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be

connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a

D-to-A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard.

• If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the

display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode

to prevent a noise from being output.

• A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a

source encoded with DTS cannot be played back.

The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback).

FMAM

Although you make the operation for

recalling a preset station, the station

cannot be tuned in, or a station other than

the preset one is tuned in.

Some memory of the preset stations was

modified because the setting of the

FREQUENCY STEP switch was changed

after storing stations.

Repeat storing stations by following the

preset tuning procedure.

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel

(When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04%

THD, 8 ohms) ....................... 100W+100W

CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07%

THD, 8 ohms) ................................... 100W

REAR L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07%

THD, 8 ohms) .........................100W+100W

Maximum Power [China and General

models only]

1 kHz, 10% THD

, 8 ohms

(When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R................................135W+135W

CENTER.............................................135W

REAR L/R...............................135W+135W

Dynamic Power Per Channel

(by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models

only]

MAIN L/R (8 ohms/6 ohms/4 ohms/2 ohms)

(When both channels are driven)

...............................130W/160W/200W/240W

Dynamic Headroom

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models

only]

MAIN L/R (8 ohms) .......................... 1.13 dB

DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel

[Singapore model only]

MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms)

(When both channels are driven) ..... 150W

IEC Power [Singapore model only]

MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8 ohms)

(When both channels are driven)........ 105W

Power Band Width (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

8 ohms, 50W, 0.08% THD

(When both channels are driven)

...........................................10 Hz to 50 kHz

Damping Factor

MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms)

.............................................. More than 160

Input Sensitivity/Impedance (100W/8 ohms)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX........ 150 mV/47 k-ohms

PHONO MM......................2.5 mV/47 k-ohms

Maximum Input Signal (1 kHz, 0.05% THD)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON)

................................................. 2.3V or more

PHONO MM ....................... 110 mV or more

Output Level/Impedance

REC OUT....................... 150 mV/1.0 k-ohms

PRE OUT

MAIN, CENTER, REAR

.......................................... 2.6V/1.1 k-ohms

SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL)

(EFFECT OFF) ................ 4.0V/1.5 k-ohms

ZONE 2 OUT ...................... 1.0V/1.5 k-ohms

Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

Output Level

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input: 1 kHz,

150 mV, RL=8 ohms ........................... 0.5V

Impedance .................................... 440 ohms

Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT

....................................................... 0±0.5 dB

RIAA Equalization Deviation

(20 Hz to 20 kHz)

PHONO MM..................................0±0.5 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to SP

OUT (MAIN L/R), 50W/8 ohms

......................................... Less than 0.025%

PHONO MM to REC OUT, 3V

........................................... Less than 0.01%

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (Input Shorted)

(EFFECT OFF) .................. More than 96 dB

PHONO MM (Input Shorted 5 mV)

(EFFECT OFF)....................More than 86 dB

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

MAIN L/R SP OUT............ Less than 170 µV

Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB)

CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 k-ohms

Shorted (EFFECT OFF)

1 kHz/10 kHz ........ More than 60 dB/45 dB

PHONO MM Input Shorted (EFFECT OFF)

1 kHz/10 kHz ..........More than 60 dB/55 dB

Tone Control Characteristics

Bass

Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB (50 Hz)

Turnover frequency ........................ 350 Hz

Treble

Boost/Cut ......................... ±10 dB (20 kHz)

Turnover frequency ....................... 3.5 kHz

Bass Extension (MAIN L/R)

....................................................+6 dB (50 Hz)

Filter Characteristics

MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R

(MAIN, CENTER, REAR SP: SMALL)

(H.P.F.) .......................fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct.

SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.)

.................................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct.

Gain Tracking Error (0 to –60 dB)

MAIN L/R ....................................3 dB or less

Audio Muting ............................................ –

∞

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Type

[U.S.A. and Canada models]................NTSC

[Australia and Singapore models] .......... PAL

[China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL

Video Signal Level ................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

S-Video Signal Level

Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

Maximum Input Level ....... More than 1.5 Vp-p

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ........... More than 50 dB

Monitor Out Frequency Response

..................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

..........................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia, China, Singapore and General

models].............................87.5 to 108.0 MHz

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms,

100% mod., 1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models only]

Mono.................................1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

Stereo................................23 µV (38.5 dBf)

Usable Sensitivity (75 ohms)

[Australia and Singapore models only]

DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) .....................0.9 µV

DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB).....................28 µV

Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models only]..........................................75 dB

Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300

kHz)

[Australia and Singapore models only]

..............................................................55 dB

SPECIFICATIONS

English

SPECIFICATIONS

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(IHF) Mono/Stereo

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models] ....................................81 dB/75 dB

(DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo

[Australia and Singapore models]

.................................................75 dB/69 dB

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]

Mono/Stereo..................................0.1/0.2%

[Australia and Singapore models]

Mono/Stereo (40 kHz Dev.)...........0.1/0.2%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]

..............................................................48 dB

[Australia and Singapore models

(40 kHz Dev.)].......................................48 dB

Frequency Response

20 Hz to 15 kHz..................................0±1 dB

AM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]

........................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz

[Australia and Singapore models]

............................................531 to 1,611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity..............................300 µV/m

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ..............................52 dB

AUDIO SECTION

Output Level/Impedance

FM (100% mod., 1 kHz)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General

models] ........................550 mV/1.0 k-ohms

[Australia and Singapore models

(40 kHz Dev.)] ..............550 mV/1.0 k-ohms

AM (30% mod., 1 kHz)....150 mV/1.0 k-ohms

GENERAL

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

............................................. AC 120V/60 Hz

[Australia model] .................. AC 240V/50 Hz

[Singapore model]................ AC 230V/50 Hz

[China and General models]

.................. AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A., Australia, China, Singapore and

General models] ................................. 400W

[Canada model]........................400W/540 VA

Maximum Power Consumption

[General model only] ...........................750W

AC Outlets

2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

[U.S.A., China, Singapore and General

models] ............................ 100W max. total

[Canada model] ........100W/1.0A max. total

1 SWITCHED OUTLET

[Australia model] ...................... 100W max.

Dimensions (W x H x D)

........................................ 435 x 171 x 391 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15-3/8”)

Weight ................................ 14.1 kg (31.1 lbs.)

Accessories..........................Remote controller

Batteries

User function stickers

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

Antenna adapter

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

* Specifications are subject to change without

notice.

V303930

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

Documenttranscriptie

UCA RX-V995 AV RECEIVER AMPLI-TUNER AUDIO-VIDEO OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI • Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of your unit in the space below. Model: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 6 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. English 19 For US customers only: EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a Yamaha Digital Sound Field Processing (DSP) System—an extremely sophisticated audio component. The DSP system takes full advantage of Yamaha’s undisputed leadership in the field of digital audio processing to bring you a whole new world of listening experiences. Follow the instructions in this manual carefully when setting up your system, and the DSP system will sonically transform your room into a wide range of listening environments—anything from a famous concert hall to a cozy jazz club. In addition, you get incredible realism from most of surround-sound encoded video sources available in the market using the builtin Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder, Dolby Digital Decoder and DTS Decoder. Five built-in channels of amplification on this model mean that no additional amplifiers are required to enjoy advanced digital sound field processing. Rather than tell you about the wonders of digital sound field processing, however, let’s get right down to the business of setting up the system and trying out its many capabilities. Please read this operation manual carefully and store it in a safe place for later reference. English CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........................................... Inside of the Front Cover BASIC OPERATION ............................................... 35 Playing a source .................................................... 35 CAUTION .................................................................. 2 Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD)......................... 40 Sound control......................................................... 42 INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 3 Tuning ..................................................................... 43 Features .................................................................... 3 Basic operation ................................................... 43 What’s DSP?............................................................. 4 Preset tuning ........................................................ 44 Using digital sound field processor (DSP) ......... 47 GETTING STARTED ................................................ 7 Getting started.......................................................... 7 Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP) ................................ 47 Unpacking .............................................................. 7 Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and subwoofer......................... 50 Installing batteries in the remote controller ........... 8 Brief overview of digital sound field programs...... 52 Notes about the remote controller.......................... 8 Controls and their functions ................................... 9 ADVANCED FEATURES ....................................... 56 Front panel ............................................................. 9 Display panel........................................................ 11 “SET MENU” mode ............................................... 56 Creating your own sound fields .......................... 60 PREPARATION ...................................................... 12 Speaker setup......................................................... 12 Setting the SLEEP timer ....................................... 65 REMOTE CONTROLLER ....................................... 66 Connections ........................................................... 14 Audio/video source equipment ............................ 14 Speakers ............................................................. 22 Antennas ............................................................. 25 Basic operation (Cover is open) .......................... 66 Using the “learning-capable” keys (Cover is open) ....................................................... 68 Plugging in this unit ............................................. 27 Using OPERATION CONTROL keys (Cover is closed) ................................................... 70 On screen display .................................................. 28 Macro operations (Cover is closed) .................... 72 Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU” mode) ............................................. 29 Methods of learning and clearing functions ....... 74 Speaker balance adjustment ................................ 32 CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE ......................... 77 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 79 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................. 82 1 CAUTION : Read this before operating your unit. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never remove the unit cover. Contact your dealer if an object falls inside the unit. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull on the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the unit cover assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the unit will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in a well-ventilated area to prevent fire and damage. <Singapore model> Be sure to allow a space of at least 10 cm behind, 20 cm on the both sides and 35 cm above the top panel of the unit to prevent fire and damage. 6. The voltage used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may result in fire or other accidents. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. 8. Always set the VOLUME control to “– ∞” before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. 9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this mode, this unit is designed to consume a small amount of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. For Canadian Customers To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003. WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED: The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. SPEAKERS CENTER REAR IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON ( SURROUND ) 11. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time, CENTER : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not defeated. 14. Do not connect an audio unit to the AC outlet on the rear panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. 15. Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 2 AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I20V 60Hz I00W MAX.TOTAL A B Features 5 Channel Power Amplification Main: Center: Rear: 100W + 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.04% THD, 20–20,000 Hz 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz 100W + 100W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.07% THD, 20–20,000 Hz Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ● Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) ● Dolby Digital Decoder ● Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder ● DTS Decoder ● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound Experience by the Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic Surround ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ● Speaker Output Mode Selection Capability for the Most Suitable Use of Your Speaker System English INTRODUCTION Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ● 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ● Automatic Preset Tuning ● Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) ● IF Count Direct PLL Synthesizer Tuning System Others ● “SET MENU” Mode which Provides You with 13 Titles of Setting Changes and Adjustments for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ● BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ● On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ● REC OUT Selector which is Independent of Input Source Selection ● SLEEP Timer ● OPTICAL and COAXIAL Digital Audio Signal Terminals ● 6 Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ● Video Signal Input/Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ● Multi-Functional remote controller with “Learning” Capability ● Dual-Room Audio/Video System Setup Capability (Custom Installation) 3 INTRODUCTION What’s DSP? Introduction Welcome to the exciting world of digital home entertainment. This unit is one of the most complete and advanced AV receiver available. Some of the more advanced features may not be familiar to you, but they are easy to use. State-of-the-art technologies such as Dolby Digital and Digital Theater Systems (DTS) may be new to your home, but you have probably experienced the amazing realism they bring to feature films in theaters around the world. To make the listening experience even more enjoyable, this unit includes a number of exclusive, digitally created listening environments known as digital sound fields. Choosing a sound field program is like transporting yourself to such venues as an outdoor arena, a European church, or a cozy jazz club. Take some time now to read more about these features and enjoy the new experiences this unit brings to your home theater. Digital Sound Field Processing Technological advances in sound reproduction over the last 30 years have enhanced the listening experience with improved clarity, precision and power. However, something has still been missing: The atmosphere and acoustic ambiance of the public venue. Our Yamaha engineers have extensively researched the nature of sound acoustics and the way sound reflects inside a room. We sent these engineers to famous theaters and concert halls around the world to measure the acoustics of those venues with sophisticated microphones. The data they collected is used to recreate these environments in digital sound fields. Some of these digital sound fields are created using data measured directly at the original venue; others are created from combinations of data to form unique environments for specific purposes. Of course, that only solves half of the problem. These engineers have no way of knowing the acoustics of your listening room, so we’ve made it possible for you to adjust the various parameters of this data to tailor each virtual venue to your taste. You can use these sound fields to enhance any source and in combination with any of the following surround sound technologies. Some are designed especially for music, and some especially for movies. Dolby Pro Logic Surround Dolby Pro Logic Surround has been used in movie theaters since the mid-seventies. It has also been available in home entertainment systems since the late eighties and continues to be a popular format for home theater systems. It uses four discrete channels and five speakers to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two main channels (left and right), a center channel for dialog, and a rear channel for special sound effects. The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. 4 Most video tapes and laser discs include Dolby Pro Logic Surround encoding as do many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that stabilizes each channel for even more accurate sound positioning than is available with standard analog processors. INTRODUCTION Dolby Digital is the next level of Dolby Surround sound system developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate audio coding. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to you. Dolby Digital provides five full range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), and two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system (left front, center, right front and just one surround channel), Dolby Digital features two surround channels, called stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the three front channels. Dolby Digital forms 5.1 channels as mentioned left, and moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2 channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2 channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with Dolby Digital in the market. English Dolby Digital Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit from Dolby Digital. In the near future, Dolby Digital will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital encoded video software. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. By using the built-in Dolby Digital decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater sound in your home. Wide dynamic range of sound reproduced by the five full range channels and precise sound orientation by the digital sound processing presents listeners much excitement and realism that has never been experienced before. DTS Digital Surround DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of superb digital audio. The DTS technology, through intense research and development, made it possible to deliver a similar encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surroundsound entertainment. The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available for home theater systems By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS installed theater’s high quality sound in your home. Laserdisc, compact disc and DVD are home audio format within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new multi-channel music recordings will also become available in the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.) Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround”, are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the six channels of 20-bit audio onto some laserdiscs, compact discs and DVDs with considerably less data-compression. 5 INTRODUCTION CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP The Dolby Surround sound and DTS systems show their full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater that uses a multitude of speakers. Trying to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your home is difficult because of the room size, material inside the walls, the number of speakers, and so on. In other words, your listening room is very different from a movie theater. However, Yamaha DSP technology allows you to create nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your home by compensating for the lack of presence and dynamics in the listening room with original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround or DTS Digital Surround sounds. CINEMA DSP The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs that are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Surround or DTS. Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields Dolby Digital or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surrounddecoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the room, letting you feel much presence as if you were watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digital-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and much surround effect in the room without losing high channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This is the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected, and the input signal of the source is analog, PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital in 2-channels. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 6, 7, 8, 9 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected, and the input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (except in 2-channels) or encoded with the DTS. 6 Getting started English GETTING STARTED Unpacking Carefully remove this unit and accessories from the box. You should find the unit itself and the following accessories. Remote controller Indoor FM Antenna AM Loop Antenna Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) User function stickers Batteries (size AA, LR6, UM-3) 7 GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote controller Notes about the remote controller Battery replacement Since the remote controller will be used for many of this unit’s control operations, you should begin by installing the supplied batteries. 1. Turn the remote controller over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2. Insert the batteries (AA, LR6, UM-3 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Close the battery compartment cover. 2 If you find that the remote controller must be used closer to the main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new ones. Notes ● Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries. (It is recommended to use an LR6 type to use the remote controller for a long period of time.) ● Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) ● Remove the batteries if the remote controller is not used for an extended period of time. ● If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material and contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Remote controller operation range 1 3 ROOM 2 CONTROL 4. After the batteries are inserted, press the RESET button before using the remote controller. A B 0 20 40 60 l00 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT Remote control sensor Within approximately 6 m (19.7 feet) RESET button 30° 30° Notes ● The area between the remote controller and the main unit must be clear of large obstacles. ● Do not expose the remote control sensor to strong lighting, in particular, an inverter type fluorescent lamp. Otherwise, the remote controller may not work properly. If necessary, position the main unit away from direct lighting. 8 GETTING STARTED English Controls and their functions Front panel 2 1 NATURAL SOUND 3 4 5 6 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT 8 60 2 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CT l2 28 EXT. DECODER 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 2 DVD/LD 4 L5 INPUT MODE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 1 VCR 2 S VIDEO J K LM N O MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM EDIT VIDEO L AUDIO R I C For the remote controller, refer to pages 66 to 67. UP CD VIDEO AUX 5R D 7 8 9 0AB SOURCE TV/DBS 3 4 –dB DOWN TUNING AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 5 TUNING MODE FM/AM EDIT TUNING MODE P Q FM/AM AUTO/MAN’L MONO EFGH 1 STANDBY/ON switch Press this switch to turn on the power. Press this switch again to set this unit in the standby mode. * A click from the switch and the initial rotation of the built-in fan will be heard when the power is turned on. Standby mode This unit is still using a small amount of power in this mode in order to be ready to receive infrared-signals from the remote controller. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote controller. 3 Display panel Displays a variety of information. (Refer to page 11 for details.) 4 EXT. DECODER button Press this button to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function takes priority over the INPUT SELECTOR setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel. The source selected with the INPUT SELECTOR knob becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated on the display panel. 5 INPUT SELECTOR Turn this knob to select the input source. The selected source will be shown on the display. 6 Master VOLUME control Simultaneously controls volume for all output sounds; front effect, main, rear, center and subwoofer. (The REC OUT level is not affected.) * The indicator on the master VOLUME control will flash when the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the remote controller. 7 PHONES jack Headphones can be plugged into this jack for private listening. You can listen to the sound to be output from the main speakers through headphones. When listening with headphones privately, press both SPEAKERS A and B switches to cancel both of the main speakers A and B, and turn off the digital sound field processor by pressing the EFFECT button so that no DSP program name is illuminated on the display panel. PHONES 9 GETTING STARTED 8 A/B/C/D/E button I REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector Press this button to select a group (A–E) of preset stations. Rotate this knob to select the source for recording to an MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. This setting is independent of the INPUT SELECTOR setting, except when the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector is set to the SOURCE position. Then the INPUT SELECTOR is used to select the source for recording to the MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. 9 SPEAKERS switches Press the switch A or B (or both) for the main speakers you will use to select them. Press the switch for the main speakers you will not use again to cancel them. On the display panel, “SPEAKERS A” and/or “SPEAKERS B” will be illuminated, depending on which main speakers are being selected. 0 Preset station number selector buttons Select a preset station number (1 to 8). A BASS EXTENSION button Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency response at the main left and right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used. B TONE BYPASS button Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone control circuitry can be used when this button is released outward (OFF). C BASS and TREBLE controls Rotate these knobs to adjust the low and high frequency response for the left and right main channels only. D BALANCE control This knob controls the sound from the main speakers only. The balance of the output volume to the left and right main speakers can be adjusted to compensate for sound imbalances caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. E MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) button Use this button to enter a station to memory. Refer to the section “Manual preset tuning” on page 44 for details. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. Refer to page 45 for details. F EDIT button This button is used to exchange the places of two preset stations with each other. G TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) button Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator is illuminated on the display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator is not illuminated. H FM/AM button Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. For a user who made up a dual-room audio/video system with this unit: The setting of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector controls the input source for the second room. J LEVEL button This button is used to adjust the output level of the center and rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this button (several times) to select the speaker(s). The name appears on the display. Then press the + or – button (K) to change the output level. K –/+ button Adjusts the level of the speaker(s) selected by pressing the LEVEL button. Moreover, performs setting changes and adjustments for functions selected by pressing the SET MENU button (L). L SET MENU button Press this button once or more to select the desired function in the SET MENU mode. M TUNING DOWN/UP button Used for tuning. Press the “UP” side to tune in to a higher frequency, and press the “DOWN” side to tune in to a lower frequency. N PROGRAM selector button Press this button in the or direction to select a digital sound field processing program. O EFFECT button Press this button to turn on and off the output from the center and rear speakers. The sound becomes normal 2-channel when this function is turned off. However, this does not apply to Dolby Digital or DTS. The signals at all channels will be distributed to the main channels and output from the main speakers, even if the output from the center and rear speakers are turned off, when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded. P VIDEO AUX terminals Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a camcorder to these terminals. A video unit with a S video output terminal can be connected to the S VIDEO terminal to obtain a high resolution picture. The source can be selected with the INPUT SELECTOR and REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector. Q INPUT MODE button Press this button to select how input signals are received from sources that output two or more types of signals. The “AUTO”, “DTS” and “ANALOG” modes are available. Refer to page 38 for details. <China, Singapore and General models only> The “AUTO”, “D.D.RF”, “DTS”, “DGTL” and “ANALOG” modes are available for DVD/LD sources. 10 GETTING STARTED English Display panel 1 2 3 DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP SPEAKERS A B 4 5 6 MEMORY ENHANCED MOVIE THEATER 12 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE DISCO JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT CHURCH CONCERT HALL AUTO 7 8 1 indicators Either “dts” indicators will be illuminated when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. A red “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a compact disc or laserdisc encoded with DTS. An orange “dts” indicator will be illuminated when playing a DVD encoded with DTS. An orange “dts” indicator may be illuminated when playing a laserdisc encoded with DTS after a video-CD or DVD on a DVD/LD combi-player. STEREO DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 0 20 SLEEP 100 90 A B 7 MEMORY indicator A flashing MEMORY indicator means a station can be saved, as explained in the following: Press the MEMORY button. The MEMORY indicator will flash about 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, program the displayed station to memory by using the A/B/C/D/E and the preset station number selector buttons. 8 DSP program indicators 2 Multi-information display This display shows the current DSP program and the status of adjustments and setting changes. Several statuses can be viewed at one time. The current station frequency and band (AM or FM) will also appear when the tuner source input mode is selected. The name of the selected DSP program will be illuminated in the following cases. • When the tuner is selected as the input source. • When a DSP program parameter is selected or adjusted. • When the DSP program No. 8, 9 or the subprogram “Enhanced” of No. 10 is selected. There is no illumination here when no DSP program is selected 3 Input source indicators 9 AUTO indicator One of the arrows for these indicators will be illuminated depending on which source is selected. This indicator will be illuminated during the automatic tuning mode. 4 0 STEREO indicator DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators The DIGITAL indicator will be illuminated when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the source encoded with Dolby Digital are not 2-channels. The PRO LOGIC indicator will be illuminated when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder is on. 5 DSP indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. This indicator will be illuminated when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is received. A Signal-level indicator This indicator shows the signal level of the received station. If multipath interference is detected, the indication decreases. B SLEEP indicator This indicator will be illuminated when the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 6 SPEAKERS A/B indicators One of these indicators will be illuminated depending on which main speakers are selected. Both indicators will be illuminated when both speakers A and B are selected. 11 PREPARATION Speaker setup m Setting up your speaker system This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field quality with a full five-speaker system setup, using a pair of main speakers to output main source sounds, a pair of effect speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a fivespeaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the fivespeaker system later. Use of the center dialog speaker is recommended When playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or playing back a source which contains center-channel signals with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater system, it is recommended that you use a center channel speaker. If, for some reason, it is not practical to use a center speaker, it is possible to enjoy the movie without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded. You may wish to choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, which has its own built-in power amplifier. m Speakers and speaker placement Your full five-speaker system will require two speaker pairs: the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers) and the REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may also be using a SUBWOOFER. The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models and have enough power handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER and REAR SPEAKERS. Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the ordinary position. Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position. They should be nearly 1.8m above the floor. Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically shielded speaker.) If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is not so critical because low bass tones are not highly directional. Main speaker Subwoofer 12 Center speaker Rear speaker PREPARATION English m Speaker system configurations 4 Speaker System 5 Speaker System The recommended system for enjoying Audio/Video sources. By the use of a center speaker, center channel sounds (dialog, vocals etc.) are precisely localized. 1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “LRG” or “SML”. (See page 29.) Basic system. You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding a pair of rear speakers to a basic stereo speaker system. However, center channel sounds must be output from the left and right main speakers. 1. CENTER SPEAKER—Set to “NONE”. (See page 29.) 13 PREPARATION Connections Caution: Plug in this unit and other components after all connections are completed. All connections must be correct, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also refer to the owner’s manual for each of your components. Audio/video source equipment ● ● Use RCA type pin plug cables for audio/video units with the exception described later. The output (or input) terminals of YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 3, 4, etc. on the rear panel must be connected to the same-numbered terminals of this unit. m Basic connections of audio units GND OUTPUT Turntable (U.S.A. model) CD player S VIDEO VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO OUTPUT 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT MD recorder, Tape deck, etc. IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD LINE OUT LINE IN GND VCR 1 4 OUT OUT ( REC ) FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER (*1) CENTER COAXIAL S VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO CD (*1): GND terminal (For turntable use) Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases better results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. 14 DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL MONITOR OUT : Indicates the direction of signals. PREPARATION AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT (U.S.A. model) AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO 1 TV/DBS CD AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN 3 IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND VCR 1 4 OUT OUT ( REC ) FM ANT TV/Satellite tuner DVD/LD PHONO AM ANT LD player or DVD player English m Basic connections of video units MAIN Video cassette recorder 1 IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER S VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL Video cassette recorder 2 VIDEO CD DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL MONITOR OUT TV monitor VIDEO IN VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel) These terminals are used to connect a video input source such as a camcorder. PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models only) This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL television formats. Set this switch to the position for the format your TV monitor employs. VIDEO AUX S VIDEO IN S VIDEO VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL OUT PAL NTSC L AUDIO R PAL/NTSC switch AUDIO OUT R PAL: R AUDIO OUT L L VIDEO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO : S-video cable (Refer to page 20 for details about the S VIDEO terminal.) Camcorder Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the PAL format. Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. NTSC: Set to this position if your TV monitor employs the NTSC format. Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. Note Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same format that your TV monitor employs, otherwise a picture will not be played back normally. 15 PREPARATION m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to only analog audio signal terminals of this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 38 for details.) * However, if you connect an MD recorder or DAT to this unit’s OPTICAL TAPE/MD IN and OUT terminals, it can record input sources connected to this unit’s OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. If your CD player, MD recorder, LD player, DVD player, TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL or OPTICAL, or both terminals. Digital audio signals are transmitted with less loss than analog audio signals. In addition, digital audio signal connections are necessary, especially for an LD player, a DVD player or a CD player to send signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS to this unit. To make an optical digital connection between this unit and an external unit, remove the cover from each optical terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not function correctly. <U.S.A., Canada and Australia models> (U.S.A. model) VIDEO S VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN CD player ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND VCR 1 4 OUT OUT ( REC ) COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER S VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO CD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT DVD/LD OPTICAL DIGITAL IN MD recorder, DAT, etc. : Optical fiber cable : Coaxial cable 16 CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT MONITOR OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT LD player or DVD player OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT TV/Satellite tuner PREPARATION ● ● Digital audio signals will not be output from the ZONE 2 OUT AUDIO SIGNAL terminals of this unit. All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. English Notes ● When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to both terminals of the same name. ● Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from dust. ● In order to make this unit perform successful DTS-decoding, the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or corrupted in the process of sending the DTS bitstream from the DIGITAL OUT terminal of an external unit to a digital signal input terminal of this unit. <China, Singapore and General models> (General model) VIDEO FREQUENCY STEP 50kHz 9kHz 1 I00kHz I0kHz FM AM TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT CD player S VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD VCR 1 4 GND OUT OUT ( REC ) COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER S VIDEO DIGITAL RF SIGNAL OPTICAL VIDEO DVD/LD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT : Optical fiber cable CD DIGITAL CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL OPTICAL DIGITAL IN MD recorder, DAT, etc. MONITOR OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT LD player or DVD player OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT TV/Satellite tuner : Coaxial cable 17 PREPARATION m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL RF output of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player <For U.S.A., Canada and Australia models> If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal, it can be connected to this unit by using an RF demodulator (separate purchase). First, connect the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal input terminal of the RF demodulator. Next, connect the coaxial digital signal output terminal of the RF demodulator to the COAXIAL digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for sending audio signals of an LD source encoded with Dolby Digital to this unit. It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal stereo (or monaural). You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD source with DTS decoded. When these connections are completed, set the input mode of the DVD/LD source to “AUTO”, and you will hear sounds decoded with Dolby Digital even if signals are input to both COAXIAL and OPTICAL digital signal input terminals of this unit. This is because signals input to the COAXIAL terminal take priority over signals input to the OPTICAL terminal. Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode. Notes ● If, for example, you play a CD on the DVD/LD/CD combiplayer, there is no input to the COAXIAL terminal, so the signals input to the OPTICAL terminal take priority. In this case, switch off the RF demodulator to listen to CD sound without interference. However, if your RF demodulator is the Yamaha model APD-1, you do not have to switch it off. ● When you want to play an LD source encoded with Dolby Digital without decoding Dolby Digital, you must switch off the power of the RF demodulator. DVD/LD PHONO 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND VCR 1 4 DVD/LD/CD combi-player, etc. OUT OUT ( REC ) ANALOG OUT FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL RF OUT OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER COAXIAL OPTICAL CD DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL (U.S.A. model) DOLBY DIGITAL RF IN COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT RF demodulator 18 PREPARATION English <For China, Singapore and General models> You must also connect the optical digital signal output terminal of the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to the OPTICAL DVD/LD digital signal input terminal of this unit. This connection is necessary for playing back a DVD source with Dolby Digital or DTS decoded, and playing back an LD source with DTS decoded. If your DVD/LD/CD combi-player has a DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal output terminal, connect it to this unit’s DIGITAL RF SIGNAL input terminal. Audio signals of an LD source encoded with the Dolby Digital are input to this unit by this connection. * To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital decoded, set the input mode of DVD/LD to “AUTO” or “D.D.RF”. (Refer to page 38 for details.) Note DOLBY DIGITAL RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. To record a source played back on the DVD/LD/CD combi-player, it must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and analog audio signal input terminals of this unit. It is also necessary to connect the DVD/LD/CD combi-player to this unit’s analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL RF signal connection. This is for playing back a source with Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoded or in normal stereo (or monaural). DVD/LD/CD combi-player DIGITAL OUT ANALOG OUT DOLBY DIGITAL RF OUT (General model) FREQUENCY STEP 50kHz 1 I00kHz I0kHz FM DVD/LD PHONO 9kHz AM TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD VCR 1 4 GND OUT OUT ( REC ) FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 SURROUND OUT GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER DIGITAL RF SIGNAL DVD/LD OPTICAL CD DIGITAL CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL 19 PREPARATION m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals Notes about the Video superimpose If your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. and your monitor are equipped with “S” video terminals, connect them to this unit’s S VIDEO terminals, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your monitor. With this connection, you can play back and record high quality pictures. Otherwise, connect the “composite” video terminals from your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. to the VIDEO terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the “composite” video input of your monitor. ● ● Note If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective output terminals. If you watch a video source that is connected to both S VIDEO and VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display information are output from only the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. When no video signal is input to either S VIDEO or VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display information are output from both S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals with a color background. * For China and General models, if the PAL/NTSC switch on the rear panel is set to “PAL”, nothing will be output from either S VIDEO MONITOR OUT or VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal in this case. S VIDEO terminals This unit provides you with S VIDEO terminals in addition to standard type VIDEO terminals. S VIDEO terminals transmit video signals separated into luminance (Y) signals and color (C) signals. In comparison with S VIDEO terminals, standard type VIDEO terminals transmit “composite” video signals. LD player or DVD player VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Video cassette recorder 1 VIDEO S VIDEO DVD/LD TV/Satellite tuner S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT TV/DBS IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT ZONE 2 OUT S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO IN S VIDEO Video cassette recorder 2 TV monitor : S-video cable 20 PREPARATION This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) for inputting signals from an external decoder of a future format to this unit. To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these terminals, press the EXT. DECODER button on the front panel so that “EXT. DECODER” appears on the display. By doing so, the signals input to these terminals are sent to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and OUTPUT terminals of this unit. Notes ● When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. ● The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode have no effect on the signals input to these terminals. The setting of “5. MAIN LEVEL” is effective. (Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details.) ● The adjustments of the output level of the center speaker, rear speakers and subwoofer are effective when the signals input to these terminals are selected as the input source. (Refer to pages 50 to 51 for details.) English m Connecting an external decoder of a future format to this unit (U.S.A. model) VIDEO S VIDEO DVD/LD PHONO 1 TV/DBS CD 3 AM ANT IN IN ( PLAY ) TAPE/MD GND 4 SURROUND OUT OUT OUT MAIN OUT External decoder VCR 1 ( REC ) FM ANT MAIN IN VCR 2 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND CENTER OUT OUT GND SUBWOOFER OUT EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT ZONE 2 OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER COAXIAL S VIDEO OPTICAL VIDEO CD DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DVD/LD TV/DBS DIGITAL SIGNAL MONITOR OUT 21 PREPARATION Speakers Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit. Subwoofer system Rear speakers Left Right (U.S.A. model) IN REMOTE CONTROL OUTPUT CENTER REAR OUT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SPEAKERS CENTER REAR SET BEFORE POWER ON ( SURROUND ) CENTER : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER Center speaker SUB WOOFER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER ( SURROUND ) CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. MAIN OUTPUT A A B B MAIN Right Left Right Main speakers B Left Main speakers A How to Connect: Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with the wire of the proper gauge (keep as short as possible). If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct. That is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit or the speakers, or both. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) <Except Singapore model> Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal. 2 1 3 22 ➀ Loosen the knob. ➁ Insert the bare wire. [Remove approx. 5mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] ➂ Tighten the knob and secure the wire. PREPARATION Note on a subwoofer connection: One or two speaker systems can be connected to this unit. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when reproducing discrete signals. When using a subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer. With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer are in the same unit. Such a subwoofer needs only the connection between the SUBWOOFER terminal of this unit and the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer. (Refer to page 24 for details about the SUBWOOFER terminal.) English Note on main speaker connections: m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED: The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end. If so, set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) SPEAKERS CENTER REAR Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. (Upper position) Center: <U.S.A. and Canada models> The impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher. <Australia, China, Singapore and General models> The impedance of the speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher. Main: If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON ( SURROUND ) CENTER : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER AC OUTLETS SWITCHED I20V 60Hz I00W MAX.TOTAL A B (Lower position) Center: The impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Main: <Except Canada model> If you use one pair of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. If you use two pairs of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16Ω or higher. <For Canada model only> The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. 23 PREPARATION m To drive main, center and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers The speaker connections described on page 22 are fine for most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to drive main, center and/or rear speakers with your existing amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit. 1 These terminals are for main channel line output. If you drive main speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. * Output signals from the MAIN terminals are affected by the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, BASS EXTENSION button and the TONE BYPASS button. 2 34 IN REMOTE CONTROL OUTPUT CENTER REAR OUT MAIN terminals CEN 2 SUBWOOFER terminal SUB WOOFER When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to this terminal. Low frequencies distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal. (The cut-off frequency of this terminal is 90 Hz.) Signals of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also output if they are assigned to this terminal. ( SURROUND ) CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAIN OUTPUT A 3 CENTER terminal MAIN This terminal is for center channel line output. If you drive a center speaker with an external power amplifier, connect the input terminal of the external amplifier to this terminal. There is no connection to this terminal when you use the built-in amplifier. B 1 4 REAR (SURROUND) terminals These terminals are for rear channel line output. If you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. Notes • Output level of signals from all of these terminals are adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel or MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote controller. • If an external power amplifier is connected to the MAIN, CENTER or REAR output terminals, do not use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals (MAIN, CENTER or REAR). 24 PREPARATION English Antennas ● ● Each antenna should be connected to the designated terminals correctly, as shown in the following figure. Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas will probably provide sufficient signal strength. Nevertheless, a properly installed outdoor antenna will give clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality only with the indoor antennas, the use of an outdoor antenna may result in improvement. Outdoor AM antenna Indoor FM antenna (included) Outdoor FM antenna (U.S.A. model) AM loop antenna (included) PHONO 1 CD 3 AM ANT IN ( PLAY ) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter TAPE/MD GND 4 OUT ( REC ) 75-ohm coaxial cable FM ANT MAIN 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND GND EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT SUB WOOFER 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter COAXIAL CD 300-ohm flat ribbon cable CENTER DVD/LD CD IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) TAPE/MD DIGITAL SIGNAL Ground m Connecting the AM loop antenna 1. Press the tab and unlock the terminal hole. 2. Connect the AM loop antenna lead wires to the AM ANT and GND terminals. 4. Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Loop antenna 3. Return the tab back to the original position to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull on the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 1 3 Antenna stand 5. Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. 2 Notes ● The AM loop antenna should be placed apart from the main unit. The antenna may be hung on a wall. ● The AM loop antenna should be kept connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 25 PREPARATION m Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. GND terminal For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the GND terminal to a good ground. A good ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Note Do not use an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. m Optional outdoor AM antenna If this unit is placed in steel buildings or an area far from broadcasting stations, it may be necessary to install an outside long wire antenna. m Optional outdoor FM antenna Consult your dealer or authorized service center about the best method of selecting and erecting an outdoor FM antenna. The choice of the flat ribbon cable is also important. Flat ribbon cable performs well electrically, and is cheaper and somewhat easier to handle when routing it through windows and around rooms. Coaxial cable is more expensive, does a much better job of minimizing interference, is less prone to the effects of weather and close-by metal objects, and is nearly as good a signal conductor as flat ribbon cable. Coaxial cable is somewhat more difficult to install at the point where the cable enters the building. If coaxial cable is selected, make sure the antenna is designed to be used with this type of cable. * Use a 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (not included) or a 75-ohm antenna adapter (not included) for connections. 300-ohm flat ribbon cable 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter 75-ohm coaxial cable 300-ohm flat ribbon cable 26 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm coaxial cable 75-ohm antenna adapter Notes for FM antenna installation ● To minimize the influence of automobile ignition noise, locate the antenna as far from heavy traffic as possible. ● Keep the flat ribbon cable or coaxial cable as short as possible. Do not bundle or roll up an excess of the cable. ● The antenna should be at least two meters (6.6 feet) from reinforced concrete walls or metal structures. PREPARATION English Plugging in this unit • After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord into an AC outlet. SPEAKERS NTER REAR • Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is not to be used for a long period of time. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON To AC outlet ( SURROUND ) CENTER : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER VOLTAGE SELECTOR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. / SPEAKER A B :I6ΩMIN. / SPEAKER AL FOR CORRECT SETTING. AC OUTLETS SWITCHED A (*2) B I00W MAX. TOTAL (*1) (General model) (*1): (*2): AC OUTLET(S) Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) (U.S.A., Canada, China, Singapore and General models) .......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS (Australia model).................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET Use these to connect the power cords of your components to this unit. The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch or the remote controller’s SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is 100W. 27 PREPARATION On screen display If you connect your VCR, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display program titles, parameter data and information for various setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor screen. This information will be superimposed over the video image. If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the information will be displayed over a blue colored background. Selecting a type of display You can change the type of display showing various information on the monitor screen by pressing the ON SCREEN display key on the remote controller. Press this key to change the screen to a full or simple display, or no display at all. A B C ON SCREEN REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER (Example) Full display Note: The program titles, parameter data and other information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit. Simple display Goes off after being displayed for several seconds. Notes ● When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET MENU mode, or adjusting the speaker balance by using the test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor screen even if another type of display is currently selected. ● Information displayed on the monitor screen in this way cannot be recorded by a VCR. 28 PREPARATION English Selecting the output modes (“SET MENU” mode) The following functions control the output signals to the speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to maximize the performance of your speaker system. * For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 56 to 59. 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL m Function description 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE Preset position: LRG Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LRG: When your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. SML: When you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). NONE: When you do not have a center speaker. The center channel sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. LARGE: If your rear speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker in parallel. In this position, full range signals are output from the rear speakers. SMALL: If your rear speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). 29 PREPARATION 3. MAIN SPEAKER 5. MAIN LEVEL Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE Choices: Normal/–10dB Preset position: Normal LARGE: If your main speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels are output from the main speakers. SMALL: If your main speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on “4. LFE/BASS OUT”). 4. LFE/BASS OUT Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: SW MAIN: If your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels, signals from the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed from other channels are output from the main speakers. SW/BOTH: Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals at LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” to “3. MAIN SPEAKER” to be distributed from other channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals. When the LARGE position is selected on “3. MAIN SPEAKER”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the main channels to the SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH position, low bass signals from the main channels are output to both of the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER terminals. Note The settings of “1. CENTER SPEAKER”, “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER” and “4. LFE/BASS OUT” have no effect on the signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit. 30 Normal: Normally, select this position. –10dB: If the volume levels to the center and/or rear speakers are lower than the level to the main speakers even though they are adjusted to maximum. The volume level to the main speakers are decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker output level balance properly. PREPARATION English m Changing selections Refer to the display panel or the monitor screen when changing the selections. 2 1 Set to “SET MENU”. ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 LEVEL PARAMETER 2, 3 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 3 4 4 L5 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM SET MENU 1 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT TV/DBS VIDEO AUX SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU TUNER PHONO VCR 1 MASTER VOLUME TV VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO MUTE L AUDIO R VCR STANDBY 3 When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 3 Use one of the buttons figured below to select the desired position. Remote control Front panel Remote control LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU or SET MENU 1 Turn on the power of this unit. (If necessary, turn on the power of the monitor to display information.) Remote control Front panel SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON or DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 SPEAKERS A Changes. 2 Select the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” by using one of the following methods. Front panel LEVEL Remote control 4 Follow the same procedure for “2. REAR SPEAKER”, “3. MAIN SPEAKER”, “4. LFE/BASS OUT” and/or “5. MAIN LEVEL”. First select the function by following step 2, and then select the proper position by following step 3. SET MENU Press once or more. Press once or more. DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 SPEAKERS A 31 PREPARATION Speaker balance adjustment This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers using the built-in test tone generator. After the adjustments, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and the DTS decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote controller. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 1 2 V-AUX HALL NATURAL SOUND 7 6 CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CT 8 EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 TREBLE 0 l l 2 3 ON OFF 3 4 4 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 2 3 4 5 DVD/LD TV/DBS 3 4 5 VIDEO AUX 4 L5 VCR 1 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 LEVEL PARAMETER INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 4 5 TUNING MODE FM/AM CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT SET MENU CD TUNER PHONO 2 PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 5 1 4 MUTE VCR STANDBY 5 Front panel VOLUME Front panel l6 20 BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS l2 28 8 4 40 2 60 Set to the “OFF ( 0 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 2 6 Turn on the power. Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the remote controller to the PARAMETER position. Remote control Front panel Remote control SYSTEM POWER ON PARAMETER or STANDBY/ON )”. SET MENU 3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding indicator will be illuminated. 7 Press the TEST key on the remote controller to enter the test mode. Front panel SPEAKERS A Remote control B TEST * Both speakers A and B can be selected. Front panel 4 BASS 0 l l 2 TREBLE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 4 4 L5 Set to the “0” position. 32 CONTINUED 2 3 5R PREPARATION English MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR 0 l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT PARAMETER EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 10 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CT LEVEL 8 EDIT TUNING MODE FM/AM SET MENU –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE SLEEP ON SCREEN MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD/LD 2 3 3 4 4 L5 AUTO/MAN’L MONO 5 R TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO SYSTEM POWER ON PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO MASTER VOLUME TV L AUDIO R MUTE 9 8 VCR 8 STANDBY 9 Turn up the volume. Remote control Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound output level of the left main speaker and the right main speaker are the same. Front panel BALANCE 0 l l MUTE 2 2 3 3 4 4 L5 You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes as shown below. Main (L) Center Main (R) 10 5R Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost the same as the main speakers. How to adjust: Pressing the + or – key adjusts the level to the speaker (except the main speakers) currently outputting the test tone. * Pressing the + key raises and the – key lowers the level. * While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. Remote control Rear (R) Rear (L) * The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor screen by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. EFFECT LEVEL CENTER + 2dB * If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test tone by pressing the or key once or more so that “CENTER”, “R SUR.” or “L SUR.” appears on the display. * While holding the or key pressed, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. * “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected, “R SUR.” shows the right rear speaker, and “L SUR.” shows the left rear speaker. * The output level of the selected speaker can be adjusted by the + or – key. Remote control If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the center channel test tone from the left and right main speakers. CONTINUED 33 PREPARATION 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 11 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST key once again to cancel the test tone. Remote control TEST Disappears. Notes Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust the sound level on your audio system by using the VOLUME control (or the MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote controller) only. ● If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to obtain proper balance. ● If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 10, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting the function “5. MAIN LEVEL” in the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position. ● 34 11 English BASIC OPERATION Playing a source REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A 4 2 CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD 4 TV/DBS NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME VCR 2 INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT C 8 4 40 PRESET PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT V-AUX 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 2 4 5 4 5 DVD/LD UP INPUT MODE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 TUNER PHONO VCR 1 5 R DOWN TUNING CHURCH JAZZ CLUB CD VIDEO AUX 4 L5 SOURCE TV/DBS 3 HALL –dB AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 A/B/C/D/E EXT. DECODER TUNING MODE FM/AM PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL 2 3 PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 1 4 Front panel VOLUME l6 20 l2 28 8 Select an input source. (For video sources, turn on the TV/monitor.) The selected source is shown on the display panel and the monitor screen. 4 40 Front panel 2 60 Remote control 0 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 2 DVD/LD or Turn on the power. Front panel Remote control SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON or 3 Select main speakers A or B. The corresponding indicator will be illuminated. SPEAKERS A DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 Front panel Name of the selected input source SPEAKERS To select the source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals, press the EXT. DECODER button. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display. (Refer to page 37 for details.) A B * Both speakers A and B can be selected. CONTINUED 35 BASIC OPERATION REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A CD TUNER 5 7 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C 5 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 PRESET PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO 20 40 60 0 dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM PS l00 PTY RT CT 28 8 60 2 V-AUX HALL AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 2 5 DVD/LD 2 3 4 5 3 4 4 L5 5 R TUNING MODE FM/AM 8 –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 CD TUNER PHONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 0 A/B/C/D/E PHONES A/B/C/D/E 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP PROGRAM 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU 7 SLEEP ON SCREEN 8 8 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 5 The current input mode is also shown for a source that inputs two or more types of signals to this unit. To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently selected source on the remote controller. (Refer to page 38 for details on switching the input mode.) Front panel 6 Play the source. (Refer to page 43 for details on tuning.) 7 Front panel Remote control VOLUME Remote control l6 20 MASTER VOLUME l2 INPUT MODE DVD/LD 28 8 or 4 40 or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB Adjust the output level. TAPE/MD TV/DBS CD V-AUX TUNER VCR 1 PHONO VCR 2 SPEAKERS A Input mode 36 DVD/LD 8 Adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc. (Refer to page 42) and use the digital sound field processor. (Refer to pages 47–49.) BASIC OPERATION Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel or the STANDBY key on the remote controller to enter the standby mode. Front panel Remote control STANDBY/ON or STANDBY To select the source connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. Press the EXT. DECODER button. “EXT. DECODER” will appear on the display. Front panel Remote control Notes on input source selection ● Note that selecting an input source means that the source which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on the rear panel is selected. * To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX terminals on the front panel, select “V-AUX”. ● The setting of the EXT. DECODER button cannot be canceled by selecting another input source. To cancel it, press the EXT. DECODER button again so that “EXT. DECODER” goes off from the display. ● If you select a video input source without canceling the setting of the EXT. DECODER button, you will see the picture of the video input source and hear the sound of the source selected by the EXT. DECODER button. ● If a different audio source is selected with the input selector keys on the remote controller while enjoying a video source, the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard, but the picture from the video source can still be seen. ● When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the same input source was last selected will be automatically recalled. ● If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is not operating correctly, “INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display. English When you finish using this unit EXT. DEC. or EXT. DECODER Note The input source selected in this way has priority over any other input source already selected. To select another input source, press the EXT. DECODER button again so that “EXT. DECODER” goes off from the display, and then use the INPUT SELECTOR. 37 BASIC OPERATION m Switching the input mode This unit allows you to switch the input mode for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. <U.S.A., Canada and Australia models> The following three input modes are provided. AUTO: DTS: This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. 1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 2. Analog input signal (ANALOG) ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though digital signals are input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals instead of digital input signals. * For CD and DVD/LD sources, if digital signals are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. <China, Singapore and General models> v For CD, TAPE/MD and TV/DBS sources: v For DVD/LD source: The following three input modes are provided. The following five input modes are provided. AUTO: AUTO: This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power to this unit. In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. 1. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 2. Analog input signal (ANALOG) 1. Dolby Digital RF signal (DOLBY DIGITAL) 2. Digital signal encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, or normal digital input signals (PCM) 3. Analog input signal (ANALOG) * For a CD source, if digital signals are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the COAXIAL terminal is selected. D.D.RF: DTS: DTS: In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are selected even though other signals are input at the same time. ANALOG DGTL: In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though digital signals are input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use analog input signals instead of digital input signals. In this mode, only digital input signals (DOLBY DIGITAL, DTS or PCM) are selected even though other types of signals are input at the same time. In this mode, only Dolby Digital RF signal is selected. ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signals are selected even though other types of signals are input at the same time. 38 BASIC OPERATION Notes on playing a source encoded with DTS Select the DTS mode when playing an LD or CD source encoded with DTS. (Red “dts” indicator is illuminated on the display panel.) If the “AUTO” mode is selected, a noise may be heard just after playback begins. Do not play these sources in the ANALOG mode because only background noise will be output from the speakers. ● This unit is automatically locked in the DTS decoding mode when playing a CD or LD source encoded with DTS in the AUTO mode to prevent background noise in future operation. The red “dts” indicator will be flashing. In this mode, no sound will be heard if a disc with normal digital signals (PCM) is played from a CD or LD source. To play back the disc normally, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel, or, the input selector key for the current source on the remote controller. English Notes on input mode selection ● The input mode for a TV/DBS source is selected with function “12. TV/DBS INPUT” in the SET MENU mode. This unit will be automatically set to the selected input mode when the power is turned on. ● Set the input mode to the following mode to play a DVD/LD source encoded with Dolby Digital. U.S.A., Canada and Australia models: AUTO China, Singapore and General models: AUTO or D.D.RF ● Select the ANALOG mode to play a normal 2-channel source with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program. ● The sound output may be interrupted in some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is made while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital input signal was selected again. ● The input mode cannot be changed for PHONO, TUNER, VCR 1, VCR 2 and VIDEO AUX sources because only analog signals are used. ● The present input mode appears on the front display and monitor screen when the input source is changed to DVD/LD, CD, TAPE/MD or TV/DBS, or the input mode is changed. The present input signal is also shown on the monitor screen when the input mode is changed to AUTO, as shown below. ● * However, the present input signal will not be shown when the input mode is switched during the speaker test mode. Only AUTO will be displayed. 39 BASIC OPERATION Recording a source to tape (or MD) or dubbing from tape (or MD) to tape (or MD) m Recording the playing source to tape (or MD) REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A 2 3 CD TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD 2 TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT PRESET 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT HALL EXT. DECODER 2 60 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 3 4 5 DVD/LD 2 3 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 4 L5 TUNING MODE FM/AM 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VCR 1 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 0 PHONES A/B/C/D/E V-AUX dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM PROGRAM TAPE/MD 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 1 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 MUTE VCR STANDBY Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller. 1 Set the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector to the SOURCE position. 3 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up to confirm the input source. (Refer to page 43 for details on tuning.) Front panel Front panel REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD/LD TV/DBS SOURCE TUNER VIDEO AUX VCR 1 Remote control CD VOLUME PHONO TAPE/MD l6 20 VCR 2 MASTER VOLUME l2 28 8 4 40 2 Select the source you want to record. Front panel Remote control or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB CD 4 40 or Begin recording to the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or VCR connected to this unit. BASIC OPERATION English m Recording a source to tape (or MD) while listening to (or watching) another source The source (except for “SOURCE”) that is selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector can be recorded to a tape deck (MD recorder) and/or VCR, regardless of the INPUT SELECTOR setting. REC/PAUSE 3, 5, 6 A/B 3 TAPE/MD A CD TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 3, 5, 6 TV/DBS VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 VCR 2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 C DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A PS l00 8 PTY RT CT 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER PRESET 2 60 A/B/C/D/E V-AUX 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY TUNING MODE FM/AM EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE HALL AUTO/MAN’L MONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 5 DVD/LD 2 3 4 5 REC OUT/ZONE 2 4 L5 5 R SOURCE TV/DBS VIDEO AUX LEVEL SET MENU CD TUNER PHONO VCR 1 VIDEO AUX EFFECT PROGRAM S VIDEO VIDEO 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 TAPE/MD VCR 2 2 L AUDIO R 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL 1 PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 MUTE VCR STANDBY Note: The cover must be open when using the remote controller. 1 4 Select the source you want to record. Begin recording on the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or VCR. REC OUT/ZONE 2 DVD/LD SOURCE CD TUNER TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 5 PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 2 3 Play the source. The sound and/or picture of the recording can be monitored by selecting the tape deck (or VCR) with the INPUT SELECTOR. Front panel Select the source with the INPUT SELECTOR and adjust the VOLUME control to check the sound output. Remote control TAPE/MD or Remote control Front panel or 6 CD Selecting another source to enjoy with the INPUT SELECTOR will not effect the recording. VOLUME l6 20 MASTER VOLUME l2 28 8 4 40 or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB 41 BASIC OPERATION Notes on recording ● The VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, the BASS EXTENSION button and the settings of DSP have no effect on the material being recorded. ● Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only a S video (or only a composite video) signal on your VCR. ● A source that is connected to this unit between optical digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR other than the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected to the OPTICAL TAPE/MD OUT terminal of this unit. ● ● ● A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded. Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe on copyright laws. <For China, Singapore and General models only> Dolby Digital RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR. To record an LD source, the LD player must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals of this unit. If you play back a video source that uses scramble or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case that display information superimposed on the picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those signals. Sound control m Adjusting the BALANCE control Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. m Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE controls BASS 0 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 2 TREBLE 0 l l l 2 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 2 3 3 4 4 L5 5R Note This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. m Using the BASS EXTENSION button Press this button inward (ON) to boost the bass frequency response at the main left and right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. This function is effective for reinforcing the bass frequencies when a subwoofer is not used. BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS BASS : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the low frequency response. TREBLE : Turn this knob clockwise to increase (or counter clockwise to decrease) the high frequency response. Note These controls are effective only for the sound from the main speakers. m Using the TONE BYPASS button Press this button inward (ON) to bypass the tone (BASS and TREBLE) control circuitry. This function is used for outputting pure sound and checking the tone control settings. The tone control circuitry can be used when this button is released outward (OFF). BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 42 5 BASIC OPERATION English Tuning Basic operation Quick automatic-search tuning (automatic tuning) is effective when the station signals are strong with no interference. However, manual tuning can be used during less-than-ideal conditions. 1 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS TREBLE 0 l l l B 2 2 3 ON OFF 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 3 4 4 L5 5 R DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 4 m Automatic tuning 1 2 m Manual tuning 1 Select “TUNER” as the input source. Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be illuminated. 2 FM/AM Select “TUNER” as the input source. Select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” will be illuminated. FM/AM or 3 3 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 or Press the “UP” side once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the “DOWN” side once to tune in to a lower frequency. DOWN TUNING TUNING MODE Turn the “AUTO” indicator off. AUTO/MAN’L MONO 4 Tune to the desired station manually. DOWN TUNING UP UP * Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. * Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station. * Use manual tuning if the tuning search does not stop at the correct station because the signals are weak. Note Manually selecting an FM station will automatically change the reception to monaural to increase the signal quality. 43 BASIC OPERATION Preset tuning m Manual preset tuning This unit can store station frequencies selected by the tuning operation. With this function, you can recall any desired station only by selecting the preset station number. Up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) can be stored. NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 2 2 3 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 2 5 DVD/LD 3 4 4 L5 5 R DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL VIDEO AUX SET MENU EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2, 1 4, 2 3 To store stations 1 2 To recall a preset station 1 Tune to a station. (Refer to the previous page for the tuning procedure.) Select the group of preset stations. A/B/C/D/E Select a group (A – E) of preset stations. A/B/C/D/E 2 3 Select the preset station number. MEMORY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY MAN’L/AUTO FM Flashes on and off for about 5 seconds. 4 Select a preset station number (1 to 8) where you want to program the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off from the display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 STEREO SPEAKERS A 7 8 DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 AUTO 0 20 100 Shows the displayed station has been programmed to A1. * In the same way, program other stations to A2, A3 ... A8. * You can program more stations to the preset station numbers on other groups in the same way by selecting other groups in step 2. 44 Notes A new setting can be programmed in place of the former one. • For presets, the setting of the reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. • Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the programmed data from being lost even if this unit is set to the standby mode or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet or the power is cut due to a temporary power failure. If, however, the power is cut for about two weeks, the memory may be deleted. If so, it can be re-programmed by simply following the Preset tuning steps. BASIC OPERATION You can make use of an automatic preset tuning function for FM stations. With this function, this unit performs automatic tuning and stores FM stations with strong signals sequentially. Up to 40 stations are stored automatically in the same way as in the manual preset tuning method on page 44. NATURAL SOUND English m Automatic preset tuning CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS TREBLE 0 l l l B 2 2 3 ON OFF 3 4 2 5 2 3 4 3 4 5 BALANCE 0 l l 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 2 3 4 4 L5 5 R DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO 2 1 To store stations 1 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 If you want to store the first received station to the desired preset station number. FM/AM If, for example, you want to store the first received station to C5, select “C5” by using the A/B/C/D/E button and the preset station number selector buttons after pressing the MEMORY button in step 2. Then press the TUNING button. The first received station is stored to C5, and next stations to C6, C7 ... sequentially. If stations are stored up to E8, the automatic preset tuning is finished automatically. Press and hold for more than 3 seconds MEMORY When the automatic preset tuning is finished The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on page 44. MAN’L/AUTO FM To recall a preset station STEREO SPEAKERS DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD Simply follow the procedure of the section “To recall a preset station” on page 44. A recalled station is shown by the frequency on the display. VCR 2 MEMORY A AUTO 0 20 100 Flashes 3 DOWN TUNING UP To tune to higher frequencies, press the “UP” side once. To tune to lower frequencies, press the “DOWN” side once. * If the TUNING button is not pressed, in a while, the automatic preset tuning begins automatically toward higher frequencies. Notes ● You can replace a preset station by another FM or AM station manually by simply following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on page 44. ● If the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, the search will be finished automatically after searching all frequencies. ● With this function, only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically. If the station you want to program is weak in signal strength, tune to it in monaural manually and program it by following the procedure of the section “To store stations” on page 44. The automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed. Received stations are programmed to A1, A2 ... A8 sequentially. * If more than 8 stations are received, they are also programmed to the preset station numbers on other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. 45 BASIC OPERATION m Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the places of two preset stations with each other as shown below. NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 2 5 4 L5 5 R Recall the preset station on E1 (by following the method of “To recall a preset station” on page 44). TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL UP SET MENU INPUT MODE VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2, 4 Example) If you want to exchange the preset stations on E1 and A5 with each other. 1 DVD/LD 3 4 DOWN TUNING AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB 4 EDIT 2 EDIT MEMORY Flashes. 3 SPEAKERS A DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 MEMORY 0 20 100 Recall the preset station on A5 by following the same method with step 1. Shows the exchange of stations is completed. MEMORY Flashes. 46 BASIC OPERATION English Using digital sound field processor (DSP) This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments. In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined operation of YAMAHA DSP and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic Surround or DTS. This unit has 10 programs for digital sound field processing; 5 programs for Audio sources and 5 programs for Audio/Video sources. In addition, some programs have two subprograms. All programs contain parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste. For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 52 to 55. Playing a source with an effect of the digital sound field processor (DSP) STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 PRESET V-AUX 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 HALL 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 DVD/LD 3 4 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 4 L5 TUNING MODE FM/AM 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 A/B/C/D/E VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU 2 SLEEP ON SCREEN 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “Playing a source” on pages 35 to 36. 2 When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller: If no program name is illuminated on the display panel, press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound field processor so that a name of a DSP program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen. Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the PARAMETER position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. EFFECT PARAMETER SET MENU CONTINUED 47 BASIC OPERATION DVD/LD TV/DBS VCR 2 NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm B A STEREO PS l00 PRESET dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PTY RT CT 8 4 40 V-AUX PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT EXT. DECODER 2 60 HALL 0 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM PHONES SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 4 L5 5 R –dB DOWN TUNING UP TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU 3 VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO DVD/LD 3 4 TUNING MODE FM/AM REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 A/B/C/D/E PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 ON/OFF TEST 0 LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU 3 3 SLEEP ON SCREEN 3 MASTER VO UME Select a program that is suitable for the source. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote controller: a) PROGRAM HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 Press once or more. 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST 0 b) For the programs No. 8, 9 and 10 only, you can select the desired subprogram by pressing the corresponding DSP program selector key once or more. The name of the selected program appears on the display panel and the monitor screen. Program name ● TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 2 A ● CD TV/DBS VCR 1 DSP SPEAKERS 4 DVD/LD TAPE/MD DSP SPEAKERS MOVIE THEATER 1 DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 A Subprogram name Program name Adjust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 50 and 51.) You can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 60 to 64.) Notes ● Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at this time. So, when you select the same input source the next time, the same program will be automatically recalled. ● If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround sound effect. ● When a monaural sound source is played with the program PRO LOGIC (Normal/Enhanced), a proper effect will not be obtained. Moreover, sound may become unnatural depending on the settings of the speaker output modes (1. CENTER SPEAKER to 4. LFE/BASS OUT) in the SET MENU mode. ● When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels may produce an unnatural effect. ● When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used and the EFFECT button also will not function. 48 BASIC OPERATION English m To enjoy a video source encoded with Dolby Pro Logic Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS Note If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with DTS decoded to another disc not encoded with DTS when the red “dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-decoding mode. To play back the disc normally, change the current DTSdecoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector key on the remote controller or the INPUT MODE button on the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off. When you select the program No. 8, 9 or 10, and the input signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital is automatically decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with DTS, DTS is automatically decoded. The following indicators on the display panel show you what sound processing is being made. 1 2 3 DIGITAL 4 5 PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with DTS is played m To cancel the effect sound The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF key on the remote controller make it simple to compare the normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound. To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound, press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time to restore the effect sound. back and DTS is decoded. Front panel 2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with DTS is played back and DTS is decoded. EFFECT 3 Lights up when Dolby Digital is being decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with Dolby Digital is not in 2-channels. 4 Lights up when Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being decoded. 5 Lights up when Digital Sound Field Processor is turned on. The display panel or the monitor screen will show the selected subprogram according to the type of the decoding. Notes Dolby Digital will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded with Dolby Digital. DTS will not be decoded if the source that is not encoded with DTS. ● ● ● Remote control EFFECT or ON/OFF Notes If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS are input to this unit, signals of all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers. ● ● If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed to turn effect sounds off when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, press the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key to turn effect sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. If the input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals. <For China, Singapore and General models only> The indicator 3 will also light up when the input mode is set to “D.D.RF” even if no signal encoded with Dolby Digital is input to this unit. 49 BASIC OPERATION Adjusting output level of the center, right rear, left rear speakers and subwoofer You can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker even if the output level is already set in “Speaker balance adjustment” on pages 32 to 34. CENTER (Center speaker output level) R SUR. (Right rear speaker output level) L SUR. (Left rear speaker output level) SWFR (Subwoofer output level) Speakers Control range (dB) Preset value CENTER RIGHT SURROUND (R SUR.) LEFT SURROUND (L SUR.) SUBWOOFER (SWFR) MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to +10 MIN, –20 to 0 0 0 0 0 Notes ● Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the same in all the digital sound field programs. ● 50 The value of each speaker output level you set the last time will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected for more than one week, these values will be automatically changed to the factory default settings. ● If the function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, the center speaker output level cannot be adjusted. This is because, in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● When one of the DSP programs No. 1 to 5 is selected, the center speaker output level cannot be adjusted. BASIC OPERATION English m Method of adjustment NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 1 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON ROOM 2 CONTROL DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B A STEREO dB ms DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 PS l00 PTY RT CT l2 28 8 60 2 4 40 A/B/C/D/E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS B 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l 3 4 2 2 3 4 5 5 BALANCE 0 l l 3 4 4 5 5 2 4 L5 5 R 6 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 EXT. DEC. TEST EFFECT LEVEL ON/OFF TUNING MODE FM/AM –dB DOWN TUNING UP PARAMETER 1, 2 INPUT MODE AUTO/MAN’L MONO DVD/LD 3 4 TV SPORTS 5 0 EXT. DECODER REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 DISCO 4 MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT 0 PHONES ROCK CONCERT TV/DBS VIDEO AUX VCR 1 SOURCE LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX EFFECT CD SET MENU TUNER PHONO PROGRAM SLEEP ON SCREEN TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R Set to “PARAMETER.” 1 2 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switich to the PARAMETER position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 1 Select the speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust by using one of the following methods. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the Remote controller: LEVEL LEVEL SET MENU Press once or more. LEVEL Press once. Press once or more. Press once or more. Press a button repeatedly until the name of the desired speaker(s) appears on the display. 2 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s). LEVEL 3 SET MENU Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make adjustments on the other speaker(s). 51 BASIC OPERATION Brief overview of digital sound field programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment. Note The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are listening in. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments. m Program No. 1 to 5: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources) ● ● ● DSP When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) Speaker output: main, rear When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( Speaker output: main, center, rear DSP When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) Speaker output: main, center, rear PROGRAM No. 52 DIGITAL DSP ) FEATURE 1 CONCERT HALL In this program, the center will appear to be deep behind the main speakers, creating an expansive large hall ambience. Orchestra and opera music are suited for this sound field. 2 CHURCH This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides. This interior produces very long reverberations. 3 JAZZ CLUB This is a small, cozy jazz club with a low ceiling. The sound is very close and intimate. 4 ROCK CONCERT This program is ideally suited for rock music. You will experience a very dynamic or lively sound field. 5 DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. BASIC OPERATION ● These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder. ● Speaker output: main, center, rear Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from the center speaker(s). ● For program No. 6 and 7 only, indicators light up as follows. When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) DSP When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) DSP PROGRAM No. DIGITAL DSP English m Program No. 6 to 10: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources) ) FEATURE 6 TV SPORTS This program is furnished with a tight sound field in which the sound will not spread excessively on the front side, but the rear surround side produces a dynamic sound expansion. This program is the most suitable for sports programs. 7 MONO MOVIE This program is designed specifically to enhance mono source programs. Compared to a strictly mono setting, the sound image created in this mode is wider and slightly forward of the speaker pair, lending an immediacy to the overall sound. It is particularly effective when used with old mono movies, news broadcasts and dialog. 53 BASIC OPERATION ● Program No. 8 to 9 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 8 PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) 70 mm Spectacle DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. FEATURE Creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, giving both the video and the sound field incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions) are ideal for use with this program. DGTL Spectacle DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Spectacle DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 70 mm Sci-Fi DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL Sci-Fi DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. Clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DTS Sci-Fi DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 9 MOVIE THEATER 2 70 mm Adventure DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL Adventure DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Adventure DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 70 mm General DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DGTL General DIGITAL DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS General DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 54 Ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. The data of the sound field of an opera house are used for the front presence side, so the three dimensional feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert hall on the rear surround side, powerful reverberations are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure movies, etc. with much presence. This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The front presence side of the sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. BASIC OPERATION Program No. 10 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 10 PROGRAM /DTS SURROUND SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) FEATURE PRO LOGIC/Normal ( ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with Dolby Surround or DTS. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. PRO LOGIC DIGITAL ) DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. English ● DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2 channels. DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. Ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding are precisely performed without altering the originally designed sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the screen. DTS DIGITAL SUR./Enhanced DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with DTS. 55 ADVANCED FEATURES “SET MENU” mode The following 13 functions maximize the performance of your system and increase the enjoyment of audio listening and video watching. 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL 6. DOLBY DGTL SET LFE LEVEL 7. DOLBY DGTL SET DYNAMIC RANGE 8. DTS SET LFE LEVEL 19. CENTER DELAY 10. PARAMETER INI 11. MEMORY GUARD 12. TV/DBS INPUT 13. DIMMER m Changes and adjustments Set to “SET MENU” 1 PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX NATURAL SOUND HALL CINEMA DSP AV RECEIVER RX V995 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 PRESET ROOM 2 AM FM STANDBY/ON DIGITAL ENHANCED 70 mm kHz MHz TAPE 2 MONITOR MEMORY AUTO TUNING SPEAKERS SPEAKERS B ROOM 2 CONTROL A STEREO DIGITAL NORMAL WIDEPHANTOM 20 40 60 0 dB ms PS l00 PTY RT CT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY EDIT MAN’L/AUTO FM SPEAKERS A BASS 0 l BASS TONE EXTENSION BYPASS 2 2 3 ON OFF TREBLE 0 l l l B 3 4 4 5 5 2 BALANCE 0 l l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 TV/DBS VIDEO AUX 4 L5 5 R VCR 1 SOURCE 6 / DTS SURROUND –dB DOWN TUNING UP INPUT MODE PHONO EXT. DEC. 8 +10 9 1 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 AUTO/MAN’L MONO DVD/LD 3 4 TUNING MODE FM/AM REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 TV SPORTS 5 7 2 0 A/B/C/D/E 2 DISCO 4 EXT. DECODER 60 PHONES 1 ROCK CONCERT MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 4 40 PRO LOGIC DSP AUTO SLEEP PCM AC—3 PTY HOLD EON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT CHURCH JAZZ CLUB LEVEL SET MENU VIDEO AUX LEVEL EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO PARAMETER PROGRAM TAPE/MD VCR 2 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 2 2 ● Refer to the information in the display panel or monitor screen during operation. The monitor power must be turned on to display information on the monitor. ● When using the remote controller, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. 1 To make changes, select the applicable function by using one of the following methods. When operating on the front panel: LEVEL When operating on the Remote controller: SET MENU Press once or more. 2 Select the desired position or edit parameter for the function by using the following keys. LEVEL 3 56 Press once or more. SET MENU Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change a setting or adjust for another function. ADVANCED FEATURES English m Function description 1. CENTER SPEAKER 2. REAR SPEAKER 3. MAIN SPEAKER 4. LFE/BASS OUT 5. MAIN LEVEL (Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system) Refer to pages 29 to 30 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change, unless your speaker system is modified.) 6. DOLBY DGTL SET LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] ● Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 7. DOLBY DGTL SET DYNAMIC RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range) ● Choices: MAX/STD/MIN Preset position: MAX ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital is decoded. “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital technology can bring the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost among noises in your environment. Dolby Digital technology also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the data of sound. MAX: In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds like a movie theater. Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can listen to a source in a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. STD (Standard): In this position, a source encoded with Dolby Digital is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source suitable for low level listening. MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a source in an extremely low level. * In this position, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, select the MAX or STD position. 57 ADVANCED FEATURES 8. DTS SET LFE LEVEL [Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel] ● Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with DTS contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals of other channels and they are output from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signals to other signals can be adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 9. CENTER DELAY [Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)] ● Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step) Preset value: 0 ms ● This adjustment is effective only when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded and the signals of the selected source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS contain center channel signals. Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated. In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to your listening position may be shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that case, sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by delaying the sound from the center speaker. 10. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program) You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program. Note that some DSP programs have two subprograms; all parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this operation. Initializing method Use the remote controller for the operation. A program number whose parameters has been changed is marked with “ ”. Press a DSP program selector key which corresponds to the program number whose parameters you want to initialize. When initialized, the “ ” mark will disappear. * * 58 ADVANCED FEATURES If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters and other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position, they are locked and cannot be changed. The following functions on this unit can be locked by this operation. • • • • • English 11. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments) DSP parameters Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode ON SCREEN display key LEVEL key TEST key 12. TV/DBS INPUT (Selecting the initial input mode of the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals) For the source connected to the TV/DBS input terminals of this unit, you can designate the input mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit is switched on. AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always selected when the power of this unit is switched on. LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the last time is memorized and will not be changed even if the power of this unit is switched off. * Refer to page 38 for details about switching the input mode. 13. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel) You can adjust the brightness of the display panel in five degree increments. 59 ADVANCED FEATURES Creating your own sound fields What is a sound field? In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we need to first understand what a sound field really is. What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains. The elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: (1) Early Reflections. Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 62 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. (2) Reverberations. These are caused by reflections from more than one surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the DSP. 60 DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing values of parameters, however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Even if the power cord of this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet, your custom sound fields will remain in the DSP’s memory for about two weeks. The following page details how to make your own sound fields. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. For the programs which have subprograms, each subprogram has a set of parameters. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the “early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. Refer to “Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters” on pages 62 to 64 for a description of what each parameter does, how it effects the sound, and its control range. ADVANCED FEATURES English m Selecting and editing program parameters This adjustment can be made only by using the remote controller and watching the monitor screen or the display panel. Note Information on the monitor screen would be easier to see than the display panel. V AUX HALL 3, 4 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 EFFECT 9 TEST ON/OFF 0 1 2 1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the PARAMETER position. Note: The cover of the remote controller must be open. LEVEL PARAMETER 4 If necessary, select the desired subprogram. HALL PARAMETER CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 SET MENU 2 4, 5, 6 SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 or 9 TEST 0 Turn your monitor on. If the currently selected type of display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN display key and select the full display. Press the button for the currently selected program once or more. ON SCREEN 5 3 Select the parameter which you want to edit. If no DSP program is selected, select a desired program. HALL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 6 9 TEST Change the value on the selected parameter to create the effect you want. 0 The selected program name and its parameters will be displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped cursor points to the first parameter or subprogram name. Subprogram “+” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “–” decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases you can hold the key down to quickly move to the desired value. The display will pause for a moment at the initial set value of the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, the mark at the head of the parameter name will disappear upon reaching the initial set value of the parameter.) * Notes ● For details about parameters, refer to pages 62 to 64. ● Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even if power is lost due to a power failure or the power plug is disconnected from the AC outlet for about two weeks, after which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values or conditions. 61 ADVANCED FEATURES m Descriptions of the digital sound field parameters Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ● ROOM SIZE P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger the value, the larger the simulated room will sound. Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound source. What it Does: Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before the subsequent, dense reverberation begins. S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 Standard setting is 1.0. Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all doubled). Level Level Direct sound Level Direct sound Direct sound Early reflections Early reflections Early reflections Large Small Time Time Time Small space Large space ● INIT. DELAY (Initial Delay) P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound. Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective surface determines the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the sound source within the acoustic environment. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds What it Does: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an echo effect. Level Level Control Range: 1 – 49 milliseconds Direct sound Early reflections Small INIT. DLY 62 Time Level Large INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Time ADVANCED FEATURES LIVENESS (Presence Liveness) How it Affects the Sound: This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls in the hall. English ● LIVENESS Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front presence sound field becomes. The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity (decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear surround sound field becomes. What it Does: Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control Range: 0 – 10. Level Level Small Large Time Dead Level Direct sound Time Live Time ● REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) How it Affects the Sound: Control Range: The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. 1.0 – 5.0 seconds. The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2 and 3. What it Does: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz). Level Level 60 dB Direct sound Level Early reflections Small 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations Large 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations REV. TIME Time Reverberations 63 ADVANCED FEATURES ● REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Direct sound REV. LEVEL Time ● S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the later the surround sound field is generated. Control Range: When Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded: 15 – 30 milliseconds When Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded: 0 – 15 milliseconds When a program without Dolby Surround or DTS encoded is used: 15 – 49 milliseconds 64 ADVANCED FEATURES English Setting the SLEEP timer Use the built-in SLEEP timer to automatically turn this unit into the standby mode after the time you set elapses. The SLEEP timer is useful when you plan to fall asleep while this unit is playing back or recording a source. The SLEEP timer also automatically turns off external units connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear of this unit. The SLEEP timer can only be set using the remote controller. To set the SLEEP time 1 To cancel the SLEEP timer Select the source using the INPUT SELECTOR and start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source unit. Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. (After a while, the display returns to the original indication.) A 2 B Press the SLEEP key repeatedly until the desired SLEEP time appears on the display. * “SLEEP time” is the time that elapses before this unit is automatically turned into the standby mode. C SLEEP REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER A B SLEEP C Note The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote controller) or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Indicates the SLEEP time. SPEAKERS DVD/LD CD TV/DBS TUNER V-AUX PHONO VCR 1 TAPE/MD VCR 2 A SLEEP Flashes. Each time you press the SLEEP key, the SLEEP time changes as follows. (Minutes) 120 90 60 30 SLEEP OFF (The SLEEP timer is off.) After a while, the display returns to the original indication. 65 REMOTE CONTROLLER The remote controller can operate the main unit as well as other Yamaha audio and video components. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of functions in sequence onto a single key, or you can use one of the preset macros to operate other Yamaha components in your home theater. This remote controller also has a sophisticated Learn feature that allows it to acquire functions from other remote controllers you use with other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with infrared remote control receivers. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote controllers in your listening room. Basic operation (Cover is open) The remote controller is designed to control the most commonly used functions. If the CD player, tape deck, LD player, etc. is a YAMAHA component with remote control compatibility, this remote controller will also control various functions. * For basic operations, the cover must be opened. m Key name and function J TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE G A/B TAPE/MD A CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD I TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 C V-AUX HALL 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 EXT. DEC. MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST G PHONO EFFECT ON/OFF F E 0 LEVEL PARAMETER D MACRO SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON OFF 5 6 7 8 9 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB MASTER VOLUME QUICK 4 H A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 0 C SLOW 3 PRESET B A REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER View with the cover opened. 66 Side view REMOTE CONTROLLER 0 SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys Press the SYSTEM POWER ON key to turn on the power. Press the STANDBY key to set this unit in the standby mode. English 1 TAPE/MD keys These keys control tape decks or MD recorders. The A/B/C switch (I) should be set to the “A” position to control tape decks, and “C” position for MD recorders. * The DIR A, B and A/B keys apply only to double cassette tape decks. * Pressing the DIR A key will reverse the tape direction on a single cassette tape deck with the automatic reverse function. * The and keys work as follows. For tape decks: : Rewinds a tape. : Advances a tape fast. A RESET button This button is inside the battery compartment. Press this button to reset the internal microcomputer for controling remote control operations. This button is used when the remote controller “freezes”. * Learned functions will not be erased when this button is pressed. RESET button For MD recorders: : Locates the beginning of the current or previous track. : Locates the beginning of the next track. 2 CD/DVD/LD player keys These keys control compact disc players, DVD players or LD players. Set the A/B/C switch (I) to the “A” position to control compact disc players, “B” position for DVD players and “C” position for LD players. * The DISC key is used for disc changers only. * The STOP key is used for DVD players and LD players only. B MASTER VOLUME 3 Tuner keys Control tuners. The A/B/C switch (I) should be set to the “A” position. +: Press this key to select the next preset station number. –: Press this key to select the previous preset station number. A/B/C/D/E: Selects the group (A – E) of preset station numbers. D / and –/+ keys The (up) and (down) keys change the parameters or functions according to the mode selected by the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch. The – and + keys adjust or make changes in the parameter or function. 4 DSP program selector keys Press a key to select a DSP program when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. Includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder, and DTS decoder. 5 TEST key This key is used when adjusting the speaker balance. (Refer to pages 32 to 34.) 6 LEVEL key This key is used to adjust the output level of the center and rear speakers, and subwoofer. First, press this key (several times) to select the speaker(s). The name will be illuminated on the display. Then press the + or – keys (D) to change the output level. 7 PARAMETER/SET MENU switch Set this switch to “PARAMETER” to edit a DSP program parameter. Set to “SET MENU” to adjust or make changes in a function in the SET MENU mode. 8 SLEEP timer key Press this key to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and set the SLEEP time. (Refer to page 65.) 9 ON SCREEN display key Press this key to change the type of display on the monitor screen. Three types of displays are available. Each time the key is pressed, the information can be changed to a full, simple and no display. (up) and (down) keys Press these keys to increase or decrease the volume. C MUTE key Press this key to mute the volume. The volume can be returned to the original level by pressing any remote controller key which controls this unit. The indicator on the VOLUME control flashes during the mute mode. E EFFECT ON/OFF key Press this key to turn on/off the digital sound field processor, which includes the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. F EXT. DEC. key Press this key to select the input signals from the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. This function takes priority over the input selector key setting. “EXT. DECODER” will be illuminated on the display panel. The source selected with the input selector keys becomes the current input source when “EXT. DECODER” is not illuminated on the display panel. G Input selector keys Press a key to select the input source. H A/B/C indicators One of these indicators will turn to red depending on the position of the A/B/C switch. I A/B/C switch Normally this switch is set to the “A” position. Use the “B” position to control a Yamaha DVD player with the CD/DVD/LD player keys (2). Use the “C” position to control a Yamaha LD player with the CD/DVD/LD player keys (2), or control a Yamaha MD recorder with the TAPE/MD keys (1). J TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator This indicator will be illuminated when a key is pressed on the remote controller. (Transmitting infrared signals.) Note The functions of the keys to control other Yamaha components are the same as the corresponding keys on those components. Refer to those components’ instruction manuals for details. 67 REMOTE CONTROLLER Using the “learning-capable” keys (Cover is open) This is a learning remote controller. The shaded keys in the illustration shown below can be programmed to “learn” control functions from other remote controllers. This unit can be used in place of other remote controllers by learning their functions. It will be much convenient for you to operate various audio and video components. Some of the “learning-capable” keys are originally empty and others have already been preset with functions to control this unit and other Yamaha components. You can store new functions to them (in place of preset functions) as desired. * See page 74 for the learning method. * See page 76 for clearing a learned function (or all learned functions). Note If the memory capacity of the remote controller becomes full, no further learning is possible even if some learning-capable keys are not occupied with new functions. If, for example, you store Yamaha codes only into this remote controller, up to about 20 functions can be stored. Therefore, we recommend that only required functions be stored. Keys which can have three functions (1, 2, 3, 4) (*1) In the “Learning-capable” keys, the keys numbered 1–4 in the illustration on the left can have three functions. This is because they have three memory areas (A, B and C). (One function per area.) You can store new functions into the area B and C, and use three functions on a key by switching the memory areas with the A/B/C switch. (Area A cannot learn a new function.) TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD A CD 1 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS 2 To use these keys: 1. Before using a key, select area A, B or C of the key on which the function you want to use is stored by using the A/B/C switch. 2. Press the key. The default settings of these keys are as follows. VCR 2 C 3 A/B/C switch TUNER PRESET The position of A/B/C switch 2 A/B/C/D/E TAPE/MD V-AUX HALL 4 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV SPORTS 4 5 6 7 8 +10 9 TEST EXT. DEC. CD DVD/LD TUNER TV/DBS ON/OFF Empty 1 Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha MD recorder. (A/B, DIR A and B are empty.) 2 Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha CD player. (STOP is empty.) Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha DVD player (except the models DVD-1000 and DVD-S700). Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha LD player. (DISC is empty.) Preset with functions for controlling the built-in tuner. Preset as the DSP program selector keys (1–9, 0) and the TEST key. (+10 is empty.) Empty Empty Preset as the DSP program selector keys (1–9, 0) and the TEST key. (+10 is empty.) Preset as the DSP program selector keys (1–9, 0) and the TEST key. (+10 is empty.) PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 1 MUTE VCR STANDBY 3 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER 4 Cover is open. (*1): These buttons are used for learning a new function or clearing a learned function (or all learned functions). For details, refer to pages 74 to 76 . 68 V-AUX Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha tape deck. EFFECT 0 LEVEL C B PHONO MOVIE MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 / DTS SURROUND VCR 2 VCR 1 A REMOTE CONTROLLER Empty keys (1, 2) These are empty keys. Each key can learn a function from another remote controller. For example, the TV key is useful for storing the function of your TV’s power switch, and the VCR key can be used for your VCR’s power switch. To record new functions It is recommended that you write down stored key functions on the provided user function stickers and paste them on the reverse side of the remote controller or the reverse side of the remote controller’s cover. About the marks on the remote controller Mark Meaning English Notes • Area A cannot learn a new function. To store a new function, store it onto area B or C. • If a key which has a preset function learns a new function, the preset function will not work but is not deleted. When the learned function is cleared, the preset function is restored. (For information on clearing a learned function, refer to page 76.) Tape (Tape deck, VCR, etc.) Disc (CD player, LD player, etc.) Radio wave (Tuner, TV/BS tuner, etc.) An input selector key and other control keys which have the same mark will work for the same input source. These marks are also helpful for storing new functions. Examples) • Area B of keys 1 is suitable for storing functions to control your VCR. • Area B of keys 3 is suitable for storing functions to control your TV/BS tuner. Memory back-up All of the learned functions will be retained while you replace the batteries. However, if no batteries are installed for a few hours, the learned functions will be erased and will have to be learned again. A B C REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER 69 REMOTE CONTROLLER Using OPERATION CONTROL keys (Cover is closed) When the cover of the remote controller is closed, you can easily operate Yamaha components including learned functions by using the OPERATION CONTROL keys. TRANSMIT /LEARN TRANSMIT CLEAR REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD CD TUNER VCR 1 DVD/LD TV/DBS Input selector keys TAPE/MD A CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 VCR 2 C (*1) 3 V-AUX PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX HALL EXT. DEC. EFFECT OPERATION CONTROL SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV OPERATION CONTROL keys PHONO CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV THEATER 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MOVIE MONO MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 9 TEST EFFECT ON/OFF 0 (+10 ) LEVEL PARAMETER SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE MUTE VCR VCR STANDBY STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Cover is closed. When the cover is closed, the OPERATION CONTROL keys substitute for the keys numbered 1, 2 or 3 and the (+10) keys on the above illustration. To use these keys, you do not have to switch the A/B/C switch. The functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys are determined by the input selector key pressed before using the OPERATION CONTROL keys. Note Whether the cover is opened or closed, the EFFECT, MASTER VOLUME, MUTE, TV and VCR keys will not change their functions. * If the MACRO switch on the side of the remote controller is set to “OFF”, the SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys will not also change their functions whether the cover is opened or closed. (*1): This key is originally empty. If this key has a learned function, pressing this key executes the learned function. 70 REMOTE CONTROLLER To operate a Yamaha CD player 1. Press the “CD” input selector key. 2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the functions in area A of keys 2.) OPERATION CONTROL Skip to previous track To operate your VCR 1. Press the “VCR” input selector key. 2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the functions in area B of keys 1. This area is originally preset with no function. You must store the functions related to controlling the VCR in area B of keys 1 beforehand.) Play OPERATION CONTROL Skip to next track English Examples of operations controlled by using the OPERATION CONTROL keys Play Rewind Fast forward Pause or Stop Pause or Stop See the table below for a combination of an input selector key and key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out. (Also, refer to the table on page 68.) Selected input selector key TAPE/MD CD Key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out Functions in area A of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) Functions in area A of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, and ) TUNER Functions in area A of keys 3 and VCR 1 Functions in area B of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) (+10) DVD/LD Functions in area B of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, TV/DBS Functions in area B of keys 3 and VCR 2 ) (+10) Functions in area C of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) Functions in area C of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, V-AUX and Functions in area C of keys 3 and and ) (+10) Pressing the “PHONO” or “EXT. DEC.” input selector key has no effect on the OPERATION CONTROL keys. Notes • If an OPERATION CONTROL key is substituted for a key which has no function (empty), then a command will not be carried out. Depending on your plan, store functions from other remote controllers into an empty area of those keys. (Refer to page 74 for the learning method.) • While playing an audio/video unit, if you want to operate another unit by using the remote controller (for example, if you want to rewind a videotape while listening to a CD), you should open the cover of the remote controller and use the A/B/C switch and the corresponding keys. (If you press an input selector key with the cover closed to change the functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys to the functions for controlling a VCR, the input of currently playing CD source is canceled.) 71 REMOTE CONTROLLER Macro operations (Cover is closed) The Macro feature makes it possible to operate a series of functions by pressing just one key. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the equipment, select the CD input, and press the play key to start playback. Using the Macro feature you can operate all those functions by simply pressing the CD macro key. The preset macro keys (the input selector keys and SYSTEM POWER ON/STANDBY keys with an orange mark next to them) are preset with macro programs. If you prefer, however, you can change the contents of a macro key by storing a desired series of functions on it. You can store up to seven functions onto a macro key. (Refer to page 75 for making a new macro.) Macros can be used only when the cover is closed and the MACRO switch is set to “SLOW” or “QUICK”. (If “OFF” is selected, no macro will function even if the cover is closed.) Setting the MACRO switch OFF: In this position, no macro will function even if the cover of the remote controller is closed. QUICK: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each command is transmitted at 0.5 second intervals. SLOW: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each command is transmitted at 3 second intervals. Preset macro keys TRANSMIT /LEARN TRANSMIT CLEAR REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B TAPE/MD TAPE/MD A 1 CD CD TUNER TUNER VCR 1 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC DVD/LD DVD/LD 2 TV/DBS TV/DBS VCR 2 VCR 2 C PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX V-AUX HALL PHONO EXT. DEC. CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 ROCK CONCERT DISCO TV THEATER 4 5 6 PHONO EXT. DEC. MOVIE MOVIE MONO MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 EFFECT OPERATION CONTROL 7 8 / DTS SURROUND +10 SLOW MUTE MACRO switch MACRO OFF MASTER VOLUME QUICK SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON 72 MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Cover is closed. (Set the MACRO switch to “QUICK” or “SLOW”.) ON/OFF PARAMETER VCR VCR EFFECT 0 LEVEL TV 9 TEST REMOTE CONTROLLER English The Macro feature allows you to operate several remote control functions in a programmed order by pressing one macro key. (Also, refer to the table on page 68.) Function of the key (and area) carried out when a macro key is pressed Macro key 2nd (Selects an input source.) 1st (Turns on this unit.) 3rd (Starts playback of a source.) TAPE/MD TAPE/MD “ ” on area A of keys 1 CD CD “ ” on area A of keys 2 TUNER TUNER VCR 1 VCR 1 “ ” on area B of keys 1 DVD/LD “ ” on area B of keys 2 DVD/LD SYSTEM POWER ON TV/DBS TV/DBS VCR 2 VCR 2 – – “ ” on area C of keys 1 “ ” on area C of keys 2 V-AUX V-AUX – PHONO PHONO – EXT. DEC. EXT. DEC. – Function of the key carried out when a macro key is pressed Macro key 1st SYSTEM POWER ON Turns on this unit. SYSTEM POWER ON 2nd Carries out the function of the TV key. 3rd Carries out the function of the VCR key. TV VCR Sets this unit to the standby mode. – – STANDBY STANDBY Notes • A key in which no function is stored will carry out no command. • If it occurs that this unit will not receive the second command because the internal operation of the first command takes a long time, set the MACRO switch to the “SLOW” position. • Once you press a macro key, this unit will not receive the command of another key (even if it is pressed) until this unit finishes carrying out all commands of the macro key. Take notice of this especially when the MACRO switch is in the “SLOW” position. • • Once you press a macro key, you must keep the remote controller directed at the main unit’s remote control sensor until the remote controller finishes transmitting all command signals of the macro key. You can also use the OPERATION CONTROL keys while using the macro functions. 73 REMOTE CONTROLLER Methods of learning and clearing functions m Learning a new function 1 Place this remote controller and the other remote controller so that they face each other. 5 Press and hold the key (on the other remote controller) which has the function you want to store. This remote controller TV RTS O 1 ST 2 2 ST K OC AD IU M 5 3 N O V U -A O H X P ST TE T C FE F EF / O F ON H RC U CH 9 CO IS 6 D O H X 0 1 B U CL ZZ JA 8 U -A P T ES V H RC U CH 9 CO IS 6 D UB 3 CL TV RTS O 4 M 5 IU SP AD 1 Other remote controller LEARN MACRO (Press by using a ball-point pen or similar object.) Flashes slowly. When learning is finished, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator stops lighting. You can release the key. Then the indicator begins flashing slowly. * If a signal is not successfully received, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode prior to step 4 is restored. Restart from step 4. * If memory capacity is full, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly to show you that learning is impossible, and then the mode before you began learning operations is restored. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the LEARN button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. 6 3 7 If necessary, select the memory area by using the A/B/C switch on the side panel of the remote controller. O TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR T C FE F EF / O F ON 2 N About 5–10 cm (2–4 in.) Repeat steps 3–5 to store more functions. When you finish the learning operation, press the LEARN button. CLEAR 4 Press the key on this remote controller in which you will store a new function. Lights up. O N O H P 3 T C CO FE F IS D EF /OF 2 6 ON H M IU RC AD U ST CH 9 1 5 UB TV RTS ST CL O TE ZZ JA 8 4 0 CK RO +1 7 SP X U -A V E * If a key which cannot learn another function is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after a key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. Restart from step 2. 74 LEARN MACRO Notes ● Newly learned functions will replace previously learned functions. ● If there is no more room in the memory area for a function to be learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator will flash rapidly. In this case, even if some keys are not occupied with functions from other remote controllers, no further learning is possible. ● If you close the cover while learning, and then about 5 seconds pass, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before beginning learning operations is restored. Restart from step 2. However, if you open the cover within 5 seconds, the mode before closing the cover is restored. ● There may occasionally be instances in which, due to the signal-coding and modulation employed by the other remote controller, this remote controller will not be able to “learn” its signals. ● When you press the LEARN, MACRO or CLEAR button, or the RESET button inside of the battery compartment by using a sharp-pointed thing, be careful not to damage the button. If you will use a mechanical pencil, make sure that the lead is retracted. REMOTE CONTROLLER English m Making a new macro A new macro can be programmed onto any preset macro key in place of the factory preset functions. (See page 72 to know what keys are preset macro keys.) You can make as many as 13 new macro keys. A macro key can learn as many as seven functions of other keys. Note If you store a continuous function such as lowering the volume level, it may not work well when carried out as a part of macro. 1 4 TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO Flashes slowly. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the MACRO button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you pressed the MACRO button is restored. Press the MACRO button again. 2 Press a preset macro key on which you want to make a new macro. CD TRANSMIT /LEARN Lights up. * If a key other than a preset macro key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. 3 Press a key whose function you want to store as the first function of the new macro. SYSTEM POWER ON Repeat step 3 to store the second, the third and more functions. You can store up to seven key functions in series as a macro. * If the seventh key function has been learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. (This shows that the key has completed learning a series of functions as a macro.) You do not have to follow the next step. 5 When you finish learning, press the MACRO button. CLEAR LEARN MACRO Notes • If, for example, you store a function whose operation takes a long time as the first command, add a command which has no function between the first command and the second command, or repeat the second command again. • If you program the power on/off switching function of TV, VCR, etc. as a part of a macro sequence, note that it switches the current mode to the other (“on” to “off”, or “off” to “on”). For example, when you press the macro key, if the power of TV, VCR, etc. is already on, the power will be turned off even though you may not want it to do so. TRANSMIT /LEARN Goes off. (When learning is finished, this indicator lights up again.) * If a key whose function cannot be stored as a command of macro is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Repeat this step. * If about 30 seconds pass before a key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. Restart from step 1. 75 REMOTE CONTROLLER m Clearing learned functions To Clear a Learned Function 1 To Clear All Learned Functions To clear a learned key function, press the LEARN button using a ball-point pen or similar object. To clear a macro you made, press the MACRO button. 1 Select the kind of key functions all of which you want to clear by using the MACRO switch on the side panel of the remote controller. or SLOW QUICK OFF MACRO TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF: Flashes slowly. 2 Press and hold the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen or similar object. Select this position if you want to clear all of the learned functions except macros. QUICK: Select this position if you want to clear all of the macros you made. SLOW: Select this position if you want to clear all of the learned functions including macros. 2 CLEAR LEARN MACRO Press the CLEAR button using a ball-point pen or similar object. TRANSMIT /LEARN 3 CLEAR Holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the key whose function you want to clear until the indicator flashes 3 times. CD TRANSMIT /LEARN Flashes. To clear two or more functions sequentially, do not release the CLEAR button, and repeat this step. Note If you clear a learned function of a key, the key is restored by the originally preset function. (except the keys which are originally preset with no function.) LEARN MACRO Flashes slowly. * If one of the following is made after you press the CLEAR button, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. Press the CLEAR button again. • MACRO switch is switched to another position. • Another key is pressed. • There is no operation for about 30 seconds. 3 Press and hold the CLEAR button again. While holding down the CLEAR button, press and hold the MASTER VOLUME and keys simultaneously until the indicator flashes 7 times. TRANSMIT /LEARN MUTE Flashes. 76 You can make up a dual-room audio/video system with this unit. In this system, you can make this unit send audio and video signals to the main room’s equipment (speakers and TV monitor) and the second room’s equipment (amplifier and TV monitor) respectively. For example, you can enjoy listening to a CD source in the main room while another person is enjoying watching an LD source in the second room. English CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE m Connections Connect the ZONE 2 OUT audio output terminals of this unit to the MAIN IN terminals (or equivalents) of the amplifier in the second room, and connect the ZONE 2 OUT video output terminal of this unit to the video signal input terminal of the TV monitor in the second room. The following optional products are required to use the dualroom function. 1 An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter emits the infrared signals transmitted by the remote controller in the second room to the other components in the main room (for example, CD player or LD player). 2 An amplifier, TV monitor and speakers for the second room 3 A remote controller used in the second room 4 An infrared signal receiver for the second room LD player etc. This unit AUDIO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT Main Room VIDEO SIGNAL ZONE 2 OUT Example of system configuration and connections Second Room 2 Amplifier TV monitor (*1) 1 Infrared emitter (*1): Some Yamaha models can be connected to this unit’s REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminals. If you connect these units in series, the use of an infrared emitter may not be necessary. OUT IN OUT IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL IN REMOTE CONTROL OUT 3 Remote controller 4 Infrared signal receiver Note Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a dual-room system, we recommend that you consult with a custom installation specialist for connections which will best meet your requirements. This unit Up to 6 units can be connected in this connecting way. 77 CUSTOM INSTALLATION GUIDE m Listening to (and watch) a source in the second room 1 Set the VOLUME control of the amplifier in the second room to “minimum”. 2 Select the source you will listen to and/or watch in the second room with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector on the front panel of this unit in the main room. 3 Play back the source. 4 Increase the volume on the amplifier in the second room. 78 Notes If you want to listen to (and watch) the same source as that selected for the main room, set the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector to the “SOURCE” position. • Signals of the source selected with the REC OUT/ZONE 2 selector are also sent to the tape deck, VCR, etc. connected to this unit as signals to be recorded. • Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English TROUBLESHOOTING General Problem Cause What to Do The unit fails to turn on when the STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns into the standby mode suddenly soon after the power is turned on. Power cord is not plugged in or is not completely inserted. Firmly plug in the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not set to either end. Set the switch to either end when this unit is in the standby mode. This unit does not work normally. There is an influence of strong external noise (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while using this unit. Turn this unit into the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate this unit again. No sound or no picture. Incorrect output cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Appropriate input source is not selected. Select the appropriate input source with the INPUT SELECTOR or the EXT. DECODER button. Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. Digital signals other than PCM audio and Dolby Digital (or DTS) encoded signals which this unit cannot reproduce are input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. No picture There is no S video terminal connection between this unit and the TV, though S video signals are input to this unit. Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of short circuit etc. Turn this unit into the standby mode, and then turn on to reset the protection circuit. The SLEEP timer came on. Cancel the SLEEP timer function. Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control. Adjust it to the appropriate position. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. The EFFECT button is set off. Press the EFFECT button to turn it on. A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS). Use a different sound field program. The function “1. CENTER SPEAKER” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE” position. Select the appropriate position. One of the DSP programs No. 1 to No. 5 is selected when the input signal of source is 2-channel stereo (analog/PCM). Select another program. The input signals of source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS do not have center channel signals. Refer to the instructions for the source currently played. The function “4. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode is set in the SW or BOTH position, though your system does not include a subwoofer. Select the MAIN position. Output mode selection for each channel (MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper. Make output mode selections suitable for your speaker system. Incorrect cord connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The player should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or sound is distorted. The component connected to the TAPE/MD OUT terminals of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. Only one side speaker outputs the sound. No sound from the effect speakers. No sound from the center speaker. Poor bass reproduction. Sound “hums”. 79 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause What to Do DSP parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. The function “11. MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position. Set to the “OFF” position. “INPUT DATA ERR” appears on the display and no sound is heard. A nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is misoperating. Check the source, or turn off the unit playing back the source and then turn on again. The sound field cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound field on a tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE/MD OUT terminals. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or power supply with low voltage. Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC outlet, and then plug in again after about one minute. A source cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. The source unit is connected to this unit between digital terminals only. Make additional connection between analog terminals. Noise from nearby TV or tuner. This unit is too close to the affected equipment. Move the unit further away from the affected equipment. The sound is degraded when listening with the headphones connected to the compact disc player or tape deck that is connected with this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn the power to this unit on. Remote controller Problem The remote controller does not work. The remote controller does not function properly. Learning cannot be made successfully. (The TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator does not light up or flash.) Continuous functions such as volume are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. 80 Cause What to Do The batteries of this remote controller are weak. Replace the batteries with new ones and press the RESET button on the remote controller. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote controller. Wrong distance or angle. The remote controller will function from a maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the main unit. Change position of the main unit. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote controller. The batteries of this remote controller and/or the other remote controller are weak. Replace the batteries (and press the RESET button for this remote controller). The distance between the two remote controllers is too far or short. Place the remote controllers at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote controller is not compatible with this remote controller. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary commands. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote controller. Learning process incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function key on the other remote controller until the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator begins flashing slowly. TROUBLESHOOTING FM Problem Cause What to Do FM stereo reception is noisy. Because of the characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts, this is limited to cases where the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high quality directional FM antenna. Set the TUNING MODE button to the manual tuning mode. There is distortion and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust antenna placement to eliminate multipath interference. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been unplugged for a long period. Repeat the presetting procedure. A desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. Weak signal or loose antenna connections. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and rotate it for best reception. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat but it is difficult to eliminate all the noises. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A television set is being used nearby. Relocate this unit away from the TV. English Tuner AM Use the manual tuning method. <For China and General models only> Although you make the operation for recalling a preset station, the station cannot be tuned in, or a station other than the preset one is tuned in. Some memory of the preset stations was modified because the setting of the FREQUENCY STEP switch was changed after storing stations. Repeat storing stations by following the preset tuning procedure. When playing back a source encoded with DTS: Problem Cause What to Do The player which plays back the source is not connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit. The player must be connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit besides analog audio signal terminal connections. The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on this unit. Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn on the DTS decoder built into this unit. A percussive noise is heard when you begin playing back a source encoded with DTS. If the “AUTO” input mode is selected, depending on some sources, there may be a case that a noise is heard while this unit is identifying the format of input signal. Set the input mode of the currently selected input source to “DTS”. No sound is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS, even though the “AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected on this unit. The DTS decoder built into this unit does not function because the player has a digital volume control and it is set at a position other than “maximum”, “neutral” or “ineffective”. Set the player’s digital volume control at the maximum, neutral or ineffective position. No sound is heard when you play back an MD onto which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto an MD. No sound is heard when you play back a DAT onto which you have recorded a source encoded with DTS. Depending on a DAT deck, a source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto a DAT. No sound is heard when you play back a source (CD etc.) even though the currently selected input mode is “AUTO”. In the “AUTO” mode, DTS-decoding mode cannot be changed to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode automatically. A loud hissing noise is heard when you play back a source encoded with DTS. Press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector button (for the currently selected source) on the remote controller so that “PCM” appears on the display. Notes • It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D-to-A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard. • If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with DTS, the “dts” indicator goes out from the display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the standard (PCM) digital signal input mode to prevent a noise from being output. • A source encoded with DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a source encoded with DTS cannot be played back. The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback). 81 SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms) ....................... 100W+100W CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms) ................................... 100W REAR L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.07% THD, 8 ohms) .........................100W+100W Maximum Power [China and General models only] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R ................................135W+135W CENTER.............................................135W REAR L/R ...............................135W+135W Dynamic Power Per Channel (by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] MAIN L/R (8 ohms/6 ohms/4 ohms/2 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ...............................130W/160W/200W/240W Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] MAIN L/R (8 ohms) .......................... 1.13 dB DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel [Singapore model only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms) (When both channels are driven) ..... 150W IEC Power [Singapore model only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8 ohms) (When both channels are driven)........ 105W Power Band Width (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 8 ohms, 50W, 0.08% THD (When both channels are driven) ...........................................10 Hz to 50 kHz Damping Factor MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms) .............................................. More than 160 Input Sensitivity/Impedance (100W/8 ohms) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX ........ 150 mV/47 k-ohms PHONO MM ......................2.5 mV/47 k-ohms Maximum Input Signal (1 kHz, 0.05% THD) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT ON) ................................................. 2.3V or more PHONO MM ....................... 110 mV or more 82 Output Level/Impedance REC OUT ....................... 150 mV/1.0 k-ohms PRE OUT MAIN, CENTER, REAR .......................................... 2.6V/1.1 k-ohms SUBWOOFER (MAIN SP: SMALL) (EFFECT OFF) ................ 4.0V/1.5 k-ohms ZONE 2 OUT ...................... 1.0V/1.5 k-ohms Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance Output Level CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input: 1 kHz, 150 mV, RL=8 ohms ........................... 0.5V Impedance .................................... 440 ohms Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT ....................................................... 0±0.5 dB Filter Characteristics MAIN L/R, CENTER, REAR L/R (MAIN, CENTER, REAR SP: SMALL) (H.P.F.) .......................fc = 90 Hz, 12 dB/oct. SUBWOOFER (L.P.F.) .................................... fc = 90 Hz, 18 dB/oct. Gain Tracking Error (0 to –60 dB) MAIN L/R ....................................3 dB or less Audio Muting ............................................ – ∞ VIDEO SECTION Video Signal Type [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................NTSC [Australia and Singapore models] .......... PAL [China and General models] ....... NTSC/PAL Video Signal Level ................. 1 Vp-p/75 ohms RIAA Equalization Deviation (20 Hz to 20 kHz) PHONO MM ..................................0±0.5 dB Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (EFFECT OFF) to SP OUT (MAIN L/R), 50W/8 ohms ......................................... Less than 0.025% PHONO MM to REC OUT, 3V ........................................... Less than 0.01% Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX (Input Shorted) (EFFECT OFF) .................. More than 96 dB PHONO MM (Input Shorted 5 mV) (EFFECT OFF) ....................More than 86 dB Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R SP OUT ............ Less than 170 µV Channel Separation (Vol. –30 dB) CD/TAPEzMD/DVDzLD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 k-ohms Shorted (EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ........ More than 60 dB/45 dB PHONO MM Input Shorted (EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ..........More than 60 dB/55 dB Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB (50 Hz) Turnover frequency ........................ 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ......................... ±10 dB (20 kHz) Turnover frequency ....................... 3.5 kHz Bass Extension (MAIN L/R) ....................................................+6 dB (50 Hz) S-Video Signal Level Y ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms Maximum Input Level ....... More than 1.5 Vp-p Signal-to-Noise Ratio ........... More than 50 dB Monitor Out Frequency Response ..................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................................87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia, China, Singapore and General models] .............................87.5 to 108.0 MHz 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 75 ohms, 100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] Mono.................................1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) Stereo ................................23 µV (38.5 dBf) Usable Sensitivity (75 ohms) [Australia and Singapore models only] DIN, Mono (S/N 26 dB) .....................0.9 µV DIN, Stereo (S/N 46 dB).....................28 µV Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only]..........................................75 dB Selectivity (two signals, 40 kHz Dev. ±300 kHz) [Australia and Singapore models only] ..............................................................55 dB SPECIFICATIONS Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] Mono/Stereo ..................................0.1/0.2% [Australia and Singapore models] Mono/Stereo (40 kHz Dev.) ...........0.1/0.2% Stereo Separation (1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ..............................................................48 dB [Australia and Singapore models (40 kHz Dev.)].......................................48 dB Frequency Response 20 Hz to 15 kHz ..................................0±1 dB AM SECTION Tuning Range [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ........................................... 530 to 1,710 kHz [Australia and Singapore models] ............................................531 to 1,611 kHz Usable Sensitivity ..............................300 µV/m Signal-to-Noise Ratio ..............................52 dB AUDIO SECTION Output Level/Impedance FM (100% mod., 1 kHz) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ........................550 mV/1.0 k-ohms [Australia and Singapore models (40 kHz Dev.)] ..............550 mV/1.0 k-ohms AM (30% mod., 1 kHz) ....150 mV/1.0 k-ohms AC Outlets 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS [U.S.A., China, Singapore and General models] ............................ 100W max. total [Canada model] ........100W/1.0A max. total 1 SWITCHED OUTLET [Australia model] ...................... 100W max. English Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ....................................81 dB/75 dB (DIN-Weighted, 40 kHz Dev.) Mono/Stereo [Australia and Singapore models] .................................................75 dB/69 dB Dimensions (W x H x D) ........................................ 435 x 171 x 391 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 15-3/8”) Weight ................................ 14.1 kg (31.1 lbs.) GENERAL Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................. AC 120V/60 Hz [Australia model] .................. AC 240V/50 Hz [Singapore model] ................ AC 230V/50 Hz [China and General models] .................. AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption [U.S.A., Australia, China, Singapore and General models] ................................. 400W [Canada model]........................400W/540 VA Accessories ..........................Remote controller Batteries User function stickers AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Antenna adapter (U.S.A. and Canada models only) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] ...........................750W 83 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Printed in Malaysia V303930